1 | % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
|
---|
2 | % $Id: texinfo.tex,v 1.1 1998/09/26 06:51:15 bje Exp $
|
---|
3 | %
|
---|
4 | % Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98
|
---|
5 | % Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
---|
6 | %
|
---|
7 | % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
|
---|
8 | % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
|
---|
9 | % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
|
---|
10 | % your option) any later version.
|
---|
11 | %
|
---|
12 | % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
|
---|
13 | % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
|
---|
14 | % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
|
---|
15 | % General Public License for more details.
|
---|
16 | %
|
---|
17 | % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
---|
18 | % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write
|
---|
19 | % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
|
---|
20 | % Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
|
---|
21 | %
|
---|
22 | % In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
|
---|
23 | % You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
|
---|
24 | % what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding!
|
---|
25 | %
|
---|
26 | % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
|
---|
27 | % reports; you can get the latest version from:
|
---|
28 | % ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/texinfo.tex
|
---|
29 | % /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
|
---|
30 | % (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
|
---|
31 | % ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
|
---|
32 | % ftp://ctan.org/macros/texinfo/texinfo.tex
|
---|
33 | % (and all CTAN mirrors, finger ctan@ctan.org for a list).
|
---|
34 | % The texinfo.tex in the texinfo distribution itself could well be out
|
---|
35 | % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
|
---|
36 | %
|
---|
37 | % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.
|
---|
38 | % Please include a precise test case in each bug report,
|
---|
39 | % including a complete document with which we can reproduce the problem.
|
---|
40 | %
|
---|
41 | % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
|
---|
42 | % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For simple
|
---|
43 | % manuals, however, you can get away with:
|
---|
44 | % tex foo.texi
|
---|
45 | % texindex foo.??
|
---|
46 | % tex foo.texi
|
---|
47 | % tex foo.texi
|
---|
48 | % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever, to process the dvi file.
|
---|
49 | % The extra runs of TeX get the cross-reference information correct.
|
---|
50 | % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
|
---|
51 | % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
|
---|
52 |
|
---|
53 |
|
---|
54 | % Make it possible to create a .fmt file just by loading this file:
|
---|
55 | % if the underlying format is not loaded, start by loading it now.
|
---|
56 | % Added by gildea November 1993.
|
---|
57 | \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
|
---|
58 |
|
---|
59 | % This automatically updates the version number based on RCS.
|
---|
60 | \def\deftexinfoversion$#1: #2 ${\def\texinfoversion{#2}}
|
---|
61 | \deftexinfoversion$Revision: 1.1 $
|
---|
62 | \message{Loading texinfo package [Version \texinfoversion]:}
|
---|
63 |
|
---|
64 | % If in a .fmt file, print the version number
|
---|
65 | % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
|
---|
66 | % they might have appeared in the input file name.
|
---|
67 | \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}\message{}
|
---|
68 | \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
|
---|
69 |
|
---|
70 | % Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
|
---|
71 |
|
---|
72 | \let\ptexb=\b
|
---|
73 | \let\ptexbullet=\bullet
|
---|
74 | \let\ptexc=\c
|
---|
75 | \let\ptexcomma=\,
|
---|
76 | \let\ptexdot=\.
|
---|
77 | \let\ptexdots=\dots
|
---|
78 | \let\ptexend=\end
|
---|
79 | \let\ptexequiv=\equiv
|
---|
80 | \let\ptexexclam=\!
|
---|
81 | \let\ptexi=\i
|
---|
82 | \let\ptexlbrace=\{
|
---|
83 | \let\ptexrbrace=\}
|
---|
84 | \let\ptexstar=\*
|
---|
85 | \let\ptext=\t
|
---|
86 |
|
---|
87 | % We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
|
---|
88 | % For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
|
---|
89 | \let\+ = \relax
|
---|
90 |
|
---|
91 |
|
---|
92 | \message{Basics,}
|
---|
93 | \chardef\other=12
|
---|
94 |
|
---|
95 | % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
|
---|
96 | % starts a new line in the output.
|
---|
97 | \newlinechar = `^^J
|
---|
98 |
|
---|
99 | % Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
|
---|
100 | \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
|
---|
101 | \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
|
---|
102 | \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
|
---|
103 | \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
|
---|
104 | \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
|
---|
105 | \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
|
---|
106 | \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
|
---|
107 | \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
|
---|
108 | \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
|
---|
109 | \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
|
---|
110 | \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
|
---|
111 | \ifx\putwordShortContents\undefined \gdef\putwordShortContents{Short Contents}\fi
|
---|
112 | \ifx\putwordTableofContents\undefined\gdef\putwordTableofContents{Table of Contents}\fi
|
---|
113 |
|
---|
114 | % Ignore a token.
|
---|
115 | %
|
---|
116 | \def\gobble#1{}
|
---|
117 |
|
---|
118 | \hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
|
---|
119 | \hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
|
---|
120 | \hyphenation{eshell}
|
---|
121 | \hyphenation{white-space}
|
---|
122 |
|
---|
123 | % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
|
---|
124 | \newdimen \bindingoffset
|
---|
125 | \newdimen \normaloffset
|
---|
126 | \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
|
---|
127 |
|
---|
128 | % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
|
---|
129 | % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
|
---|
130 | % since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
|
---|
131 | %
|
---|
132 | \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
|
---|
133 | \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
|
---|
134 | \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
|
---|
135 | \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
|
---|
136 | \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
|
---|
137 | \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
|
---|
138 | }%
|
---|
139 | \else
|
---|
140 | \def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
|
---|
141 | \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
|
---|
142 | \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
|
---|
143 | \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
|
---|
144 | \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
|
---|
145 | \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
|
---|
146 | }%
|
---|
147 | \fi
|
---|
148 |
|
---|
149 | % For @cropmarks command.
|
---|
150 | % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
|
---|
151 | %
|
---|
152 | \newif\ifcropmarks
|
---|
153 | \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
|
---|
154 | %
|
---|
155 | % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
|
---|
156 | % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
|
---|
157 | %
|
---|
158 | \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
|
---|
159 | \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
|
---|
160 | \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
|
---|
161 | \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
|
---|
162 |
|
---|
163 | % Main output routine.
|
---|
164 | \chardef\PAGE = 255
|
---|
165 | \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
|
---|
166 |
|
---|
167 | \newbox\headlinebox
|
---|
168 | \newbox\footlinebox
|
---|
169 |
|
---|
170 | % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
|
---|
171 | % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
|
---|
172 | \def\onepageout#1{%
|
---|
173 | \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
|
---|
174 | %
|
---|
175 | \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
|
---|
176 | \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
|
---|
177 | %
|
---|
178 | % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
|
---|
179 | % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
|
---|
180 | \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
|
---|
181 | \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
|
---|
182 | %
|
---|
183 | {%
|
---|
184 | % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
|
---|
185 | % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
|
---|
186 | % before the \shipout runs.
|
---|
187 | %
|
---|
188 | \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
|
---|
189 | \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
|
---|
190 | \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
|
---|
191 | % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
|
---|
192 | \shipout\vbox{%
|
---|
193 | \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
|
---|
194 | \hsize = \outerhsize
|
---|
195 | \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
|
---|
196 | \nointerlineskip
|
---|
197 | \line{%
|
---|
198 | \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
---|
199 | \hfill
|
---|
200 | \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
---|
201 | }%
|
---|
202 | \vskip\topandbottommargin
|
---|
203 | \line\bgroup
|
---|
204 | \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
|
---|
205 | \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
|
---|
206 | \vbox\bgroup
|
---|
207 | \fi
|
---|
208 | %
|
---|
209 | \unvbox\headlinebox
|
---|
210 | \pagebody{#1}%
|
---|
211 | \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
|
---|
212 | % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
|
---|
213 | % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
|
---|
214 | % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
|
---|
215 | \vskip 2\baselineskip
|
---|
216 | \unvbox\footlinebox
|
---|
217 | \fi
|
---|
218 | %
|
---|
219 | \ifcropmarks
|
---|
220 | \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
|
---|
221 | \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
|
---|
222 | \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
|
---|
223 | \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
|
---|
224 | \line{%
|
---|
225 | \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
---|
226 | \hfill
|
---|
227 | \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
---|
228 | }%
|
---|
229 | \nointerlineskip
|
---|
230 | \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
|
---|
231 | \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
|
---|
232 | \fi
|
---|
233 | }% end of \shipout\vbox
|
---|
234 | }% end of group with \turnoffactive
|
---|
235 | \advancepageno
|
---|
236 | \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
|
---|
237 | }
|
---|
238 |
|
---|
239 | \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
|
---|
240 |
|
---|
241 | \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
|
---|
242 | {\catcode`\@ =11
|
---|
243 | \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
|
---|
244 | % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
|
---|
245 | \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
|
---|
246 | \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
|
---|
247 | \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
|
---|
248 | \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
|
---|
249 | \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
|
---|
250 | }
|
---|
251 |
|
---|
252 | % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
|
---|
253 | % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
|
---|
254 | % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
|
---|
255 | %
|
---|
256 | \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
|
---|
257 | \def\nstop{\vbox
|
---|
258 | {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
|
---|
259 | \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
|
---|
260 | \def\nsbot{\vbox
|
---|
261 | {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
|
---|
262 |
|
---|
263 | % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
|
---|
264 | % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
|
---|
265 | % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
|
---|
266 | %
|
---|
267 | \def\parsearg#1{%
|
---|
268 | \let\next = #1%
|
---|
269 | \begingroup
|
---|
270 | \obeylines
|
---|
271 | \futurelet\temp\parseargx
|
---|
272 | }
|
---|
273 |
|
---|
274 | % If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
|
---|
275 | % the like), remove it and recurse. Otherwise, we're done.
|
---|
276 | \def\parseargx{%
|
---|
277 | % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
|
---|
278 | \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
|
---|
279 | \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
|
---|
280 | \else
|
---|
281 | \expandafter\parseargline
|
---|
282 | \fi
|
---|
283 | }
|
---|
284 |
|
---|
285 | % Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
|
---|
286 | {\obeyspaces %
|
---|
287 | \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
|
---|
288 |
|
---|
289 | {\obeylines %
|
---|
290 | \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
|
---|
291 | \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
|
---|
292 | %
|
---|
293 | % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
|
---|
294 | % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
|
---|
295 | \argremovec #1\c\relax %
|
---|
296 | \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
|
---|
297 | %
|
---|
298 | % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
|
---|
299 | \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
|
---|
300 | }%
|
---|
301 | }
|
---|
302 |
|
---|
303 | % Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
|
---|
304 | % do that for us. The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
|
---|
305 | % in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
|
---|
306 | % just to delimit the argument to the \c.
|
---|
307 | \def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
|
---|
308 | \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
|
---|
309 |
|
---|
310 | % \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
|
---|
311 | % @end itemize @c foo
|
---|
312 | % will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
|
---|
313 | % `itemize'. Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
|
---|
314 | % result to \toks0.
|
---|
315 | %
|
---|
316 | % This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
|
---|
317 | % in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
|
---|
318 | % Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands. (If it ever
|
---|
319 | % does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
|
---|
320 | % here.) But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
|
---|
321 | % \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
|
---|
322 | % that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
|
---|
323 | %
|
---|
324 | \def\removeactivespaces#1{%
|
---|
325 | \begingroup
|
---|
326 | \ignoreactivespaces
|
---|
327 | \edef\temp{#1}%
|
---|
328 | \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
|
---|
329 | \endgroup
|
---|
330 | }
|
---|
331 |
|
---|
332 | % Change the active space to expand to nothing.
|
---|
333 | %
|
---|
334 | \begingroup
|
---|
335 | \obeyspaces
|
---|
336 | \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
|
---|
337 | \endgroup
|
---|
338 |
|
---|
339 |
|
---|
340 | \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
|
---|
341 |
|
---|
342 | %% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
|
---|
343 | %% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
|
---|
344 | \newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
|
---|
345 | \def\ENVcheck{%
|
---|
346 | \ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
|
---|
347 | \endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
|
---|
348 |
|
---|
349 | % @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now.
|
---|
350 | \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
|
---|
351 |
|
---|
352 | \outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
|
---|
353 |
|
---|
354 | \def\beginxxx #1{%
|
---|
355 | \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
|
---|
356 | {\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
|
---|
357 | \csname #1\endcsname\fi}
|
---|
358 |
|
---|
359 | % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
|
---|
360 | %
|
---|
361 | \def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
|
---|
362 | \def\endxxx #1{%
|
---|
363 | \removeactivespaces{#1}%
|
---|
364 | \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
|
---|
365 | %
|
---|
366 | \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
|
---|
367 | \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
|
---|
368 | % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
|
---|
369 | \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
---|
370 | \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
|
---|
371 | \else
|
---|
372 | \unmatchedenderror\endthing
|
---|
373 | \fi
|
---|
374 | \else
|
---|
375 | % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
|
---|
376 | \csname E\endthing\endcsname
|
---|
377 | \fi
|
---|
378 | }
|
---|
379 |
|
---|
380 | % There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started. Give an error.
|
---|
381 | %
|
---|
382 | \def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
|
---|
383 | \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
---|
384 | \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
|
---|
385 | }
|
---|
386 |
|
---|
387 | % Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
|
---|
388 | %
|
---|
389 | \def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
|
---|
390 | \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
|
---|
391 | }
|
---|
392 |
|
---|
393 |
|
---|
394 | % Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
|
---|
395 | % \nonfillstart and \quotations).
|
---|
396 | \newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
|
---|
397 | \def\singlespace{%
|
---|
398 | % Why was this kern here? It messes up equalizing space above and below
|
---|
399 | % environments. --karl, 6may93
|
---|
400 | %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
|
---|
401 | %\kern \baselineskip}%
|
---|
402 | \setleading \singlespaceskip
|
---|
403 | }
|
---|
404 |
|
---|
405 | %% Simple single-character @ commands
|
---|
406 |
|
---|
407 | % @@ prints an @
|
---|
408 | % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
|
---|
409 | \def\@{{\tt\char64}}
|
---|
410 |
|
---|
411 | % This is turned off because it was never documented
|
---|
412 | % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
|
---|
413 | %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
|
---|
414 | %% but suppressing ligatures.
|
---|
415 | %\def\`{{`}}
|
---|
416 | %\def\'{{'}}
|
---|
417 |
|
---|
418 | % Used to generate quoted braces.
|
---|
419 | \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
|
---|
420 | \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
|
---|
421 | \let\{=\mylbrace
|
---|
422 | \let\}=\myrbrace
|
---|
423 | \begingroup
|
---|
424 | % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
|
---|
425 | \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
|
---|
426 | \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
|
---|
427 | \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
|
---|
428 | @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
|
---|
429 | @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
|
---|
430 | @endgroup
|
---|
431 |
|
---|
432 | % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
|
---|
433 | % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
|
---|
434 | \let\, = \c
|
---|
435 | \let\dotaccent = \.
|
---|
436 | \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
|
---|
437 | \let\tieaccent = \t
|
---|
438 | \let\ubaraccent = \b
|
---|
439 | \let\udotaccent = \d
|
---|
440 |
|
---|
441 | % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
|
---|
442 | % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
|
---|
443 | \def\questiondown{?`}
|
---|
444 | \def\exclamdown{!`}
|
---|
445 |
|
---|
446 | % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
|
---|
447 | \def\imacro{i}
|
---|
448 | \def\jmacro{j}
|
---|
449 | \def\dotless#1{%
|
---|
450 | \def\temp{#1}%
|
---|
451 | \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
|
---|
452 | \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
|
---|
453 | \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
|
---|
454 | \fi\fi
|
---|
455 | }
|
---|
456 |
|
---|
457 | % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
|
---|
458 | % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
|
---|
459 | % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
|
---|
460 | % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
|
---|
461 | % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
|
---|
462 | {\catcode`@ = 11
|
---|
463 | % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
|
---|
464 | % if the definition is written into an index file.
|
---|
465 | \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
|
---|
466 | \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
|
---|
467 | }
|
---|
468 |
|
---|
469 | % @: forces normal size whitespace following.
|
---|
470 | \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
|
---|
471 |
|
---|
472 | % @* forces a line break.
|
---|
473 | \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
|
---|
474 |
|
---|
475 | % @. is an end-of-sentence period.
|
---|
476 | \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
|
---|
477 |
|
---|
478 | % @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
|
---|
479 | \def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
|
---|
480 |
|
---|
481 | % @? is an end-of-sentence query.
|
---|
482 | \def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
|
---|
483 |
|
---|
484 | % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
|
---|
485 | % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
|
---|
486 | % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
|
---|
487 | \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
|
---|
488 |
|
---|
489 | % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
|
---|
490 | % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
|
---|
491 | % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
|
---|
492 | % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
|
---|
493 | % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
|
---|
494 | % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
|
---|
495 | % the text is small, which looks bad.
|
---|
496 | %
|
---|
497 | \def\group{\begingroup
|
---|
498 | \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
|
---|
499 | \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
|
---|
500 | \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
|
---|
501 | \fi
|
---|
502 | %
|
---|
503 | % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
|
---|
504 | % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
|
---|
505 | % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it. (See p.82 of
|
---|
506 | % the TeXbook.) Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
|
---|
507 | % above. But it's pretty close.
|
---|
508 | \def\Egroup{%
|
---|
509 | \egroup % End the \vtop.
|
---|
510 | \endgroup % End the \group.
|
---|
511 | }%
|
---|
512 | %
|
---|
513 | \vtop\bgroup
|
---|
514 | % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
|
---|
515 | % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
|
---|
516 | % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
|
---|
517 | % and the first line afterwards is too small. But we can't put the
|
---|
518 | % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
|
---|
519 | % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
|
---|
520 | \everypar = {\strut}%
|
---|
521 | %
|
---|
522 | % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
|
---|
523 | % normal interline spacing.
|
---|
524 | \offinterlineskip
|
---|
525 | %
|
---|
526 | % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
|
---|
527 | % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
|
---|
528 | % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
|
---|
529 | % turned off the interline space. Simplest is to make them be an
|
---|
530 | % empty paragraph.
|
---|
531 | \ifx\par\lisppar
|
---|
532 | \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
|
---|
533 | %
|
---|
534 | % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
|
---|
535 | \obeylines
|
---|
536 | \fi
|
---|
537 | %
|
---|
538 | % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
|
---|
539 | % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
|
---|
540 | % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
|
---|
541 | % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
|
---|
542 | % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
|
---|
543 | % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
|
---|
544 | \comment
|
---|
545 | }
|
---|
546 | %
|
---|
547 | % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
|
---|
548 | % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
|
---|
549 | %
|
---|
550 | \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
|
---|
551 | group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
|
---|
552 | where each line of input produces a line of output.}
|
---|
553 |
|
---|
554 | % @need space-in-mils
|
---|
555 | % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
|
---|
556 |
|
---|
557 | \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
|
---|
558 |
|
---|
559 | \def\need{\parsearg\needx}
|
---|
560 |
|
---|
561 | % Old definition--didn't work.
|
---|
562 | %\def\needx #1{\par %
|
---|
563 | %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
|
---|
564 | %% if the depth of the box does not fit.
|
---|
565 | %{\baselineskip=0pt%
|
---|
566 | %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
|
---|
567 | %\prevdepth=-1000pt
|
---|
568 | %}}
|
---|
569 |
|
---|
570 | \def\needx#1{%
|
---|
571 | % Go into vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
|
---|
572 | % paragraph.
|
---|
573 | \par
|
---|
574 | %
|
---|
575 | % Don't add any leading before our big empty box, but allow a page
|
---|
576 | % break, since the best break might be right here.
|
---|
577 | \allowbreak
|
---|
578 | \nointerlineskip
|
---|
579 | \vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}%
|
---|
580 | %
|
---|
581 | % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
|
---|
582 | % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
|
---|
583 | % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
|
---|
584 | % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
|
---|
585 | % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
|
---|
586 | %
|
---|
587 | % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
|
---|
588 | % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
|
---|
589 | % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
|
---|
590 | % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
|
---|
591 | % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
|
---|
592 | % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
|
---|
593 | % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
|
---|
594 | \penalty9999
|
---|
595 | %
|
---|
596 | % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
|
---|
597 | \kern -#1\mil
|
---|
598 | %
|
---|
599 | % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
|
---|
600 | \nobreak
|
---|
601 | }
|
---|
602 |
|
---|
603 | % @br forces paragraph break
|
---|
604 |
|
---|
605 | \let\br = \par
|
---|
606 |
|
---|
607 | % @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
|
---|
608 | % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
|
---|
609 | % font as three actual period characters.
|
---|
610 | %
|
---|
611 | \def\dots{%
|
---|
612 | \leavevmode
|
---|
613 | \hbox to 1.5em{%
|
---|
614 | \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
|
---|
615 | .\hss.\hss.%
|
---|
616 | \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
|
---|
617 | }%
|
---|
618 | }
|
---|
619 |
|
---|
620 | % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
|
---|
621 | %
|
---|
622 | \def\enddots{%
|
---|
623 | \leavevmode
|
---|
624 | \hbox to 2em{%
|
---|
625 | \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
|
---|
626 | .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
|
---|
627 | \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
|
---|
628 | }%
|
---|
629 | \spacefactor=3000
|
---|
630 | }
|
---|
631 |
|
---|
632 |
|
---|
633 | % @page forces the start of a new page
|
---|
634 | %
|
---|
635 | \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
---|
636 |
|
---|
637 | % @exdent text....
|
---|
638 | % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
|
---|
639 |
|
---|
640 | % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
|
---|
641 | % That's how much \exdent should take out.
|
---|
642 | \newskip\exdentamount
|
---|
643 |
|
---|
644 | % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
|
---|
645 | \def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
|
---|
646 | \def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
|
---|
647 |
|
---|
648 | % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
|
---|
649 | \def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
|
---|
650 | \def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
|
---|
651 | \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
|
---|
652 |
|
---|
653 | % @inmargin{TEXT} puts TEXT in the margin next to the current paragraph.
|
---|
654 |
|
---|
655 | \def\inmargin#1{%
|
---|
656 | \strut\vadjust{\nobreak\kern-\strutdepth
|
---|
657 | \vtop to \strutdepth{\baselineskip\strutdepth\vss
|
---|
658 | \llap{\rightskip=\inmarginspacing \vbox{\noindent #1}}\null}}}
|
---|
659 | \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
|
---|
660 | \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
|
---|
661 |
|
---|
662 | %\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
|
---|
663 |
|
---|
664 | % @include file insert text of that file as input.
|
---|
665 | % Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
|
---|
666 | \def\include{\begingroup
|
---|
667 | \catcode`\\=12
|
---|
668 | \catcode`~=12
|
---|
669 | \catcode`^=12
|
---|
670 | \catcode`_=12
|
---|
671 | \catcode`|=12
|
---|
672 | \catcode`<=12
|
---|
673 | \catcode`>=12
|
---|
674 | \catcode`+=12
|
---|
675 | \parsearg\includezzz}
|
---|
676 | % Restore active chars for included file.
|
---|
677 | \def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
|
---|
678 | % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
|
---|
679 | \def\thisfile{#1}%
|
---|
680 | \input\thisfile
|
---|
681 | \endgroup}
|
---|
682 |
|
---|
683 | \def\thisfile{}
|
---|
684 |
|
---|
685 | % @center line outputs that line, centered
|
---|
686 |
|
---|
687 | \def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
|
---|
688 | \def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
|
---|
689 | \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
---|
690 | \centerline{#1}}}
|
---|
691 |
|
---|
692 | % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
|
---|
693 |
|
---|
694 | \def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
|
---|
695 | \def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
|
---|
696 |
|
---|
697 | % @comment ...line which is ignored...
|
---|
698 | % @c is the same as @comment
|
---|
699 | % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
|
---|
700 |
|
---|
701 | \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
|
---|
702 | \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
|
---|
703 | \commentxxx}
|
---|
704 | {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
|
---|
705 |
|
---|
706 | \let\c=\comment
|
---|
707 |
|
---|
708 | % @paragraphindent is defined for the Info formatting commands only.
|
---|
709 | \let\paragraphindent=\comment
|
---|
710 |
|
---|
711 | % Prevent errors for section commands.
|
---|
712 | % Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
|
---|
713 | \def\ignoresections{%
|
---|
714 | \let\chapter=\relax
|
---|
715 | \let\unnumbered=\relax
|
---|
716 | \let\top=\relax
|
---|
717 | \let\unnumberedsec=\relax
|
---|
718 | \let\unnumberedsection=\relax
|
---|
719 | \let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
|
---|
720 | \let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
|
---|
721 | \let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
|
---|
722 | \let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
|
---|
723 | \let\section=\relax
|
---|
724 | \let\subsec=\relax
|
---|
725 | \let\subsubsec=\relax
|
---|
726 | \let\subsection=\relax
|
---|
727 | \let\subsubsection=\relax
|
---|
728 | \let\appendix=\relax
|
---|
729 | \let\appendixsec=\relax
|
---|
730 | \let\appendixsection=\relax
|
---|
731 | \let\appendixsubsec=\relax
|
---|
732 | \let\appendixsubsection=\relax
|
---|
733 | \let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
|
---|
734 | \let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
|
---|
735 | \let\contents=\relax
|
---|
736 | \let\smallbook=\relax
|
---|
737 | \let\titlepage=\relax
|
---|
738 | }
|
---|
739 |
|
---|
740 | % Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
|
---|
741 | % and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
|
---|
742 | % incorrectly.
|
---|
743 | %
|
---|
744 | \def\ignoremorecommands{%
|
---|
745 | \let\defcodeindex = \relax
|
---|
746 | \let\defcv = \relax
|
---|
747 | \let\deffn = \relax
|
---|
748 | \let\deffnx = \relax
|
---|
749 | \let\defindex = \relax
|
---|
750 | \let\defivar = \relax
|
---|
751 | \let\defmac = \relax
|
---|
752 | \let\defmethod = \relax
|
---|
753 | \let\defop = \relax
|
---|
754 | \let\defopt = \relax
|
---|
755 | \let\defspec = \relax
|
---|
756 | \let\deftp = \relax
|
---|
757 | \let\deftypefn = \relax
|
---|
758 | \let\deftypefun = \relax
|
---|
759 | \let\deftypevar = \relax
|
---|
760 | \let\deftypevr = \relax
|
---|
761 | \let\defun = \relax
|
---|
762 | \let\defvar = \relax
|
---|
763 | \let\defvr = \relax
|
---|
764 | \let\ref = \relax
|
---|
765 | \let\xref = \relax
|
---|
766 | \let\printindex = \relax
|
---|
767 | \let\pxref = \relax
|
---|
768 | \let\settitle = \relax
|
---|
769 | \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
|
---|
770 | \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
|
---|
771 | \let\everyheading = \relax
|
---|
772 | \let\evenheading = \relax
|
---|
773 | \let\oddheading = \relax
|
---|
774 | \let\everyfooting = \relax
|
---|
775 | \let\evenfooting = \relax
|
---|
776 | \let\oddfooting = \relax
|
---|
777 | \let\headings = \relax
|
---|
778 | \let\include = \relax
|
---|
779 | \let\lowersections = \relax
|
---|
780 | \let\down = \relax
|
---|
781 | \let\raisesections = \relax
|
---|
782 | \let\up = \relax
|
---|
783 | \let\set = \relax
|
---|
784 | \let\clear = \relax
|
---|
785 | \let\item = \relax
|
---|
786 | }
|
---|
787 |
|
---|
788 | % Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore.
|
---|
789 | %
|
---|
790 | \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
|
---|
791 |
|
---|
792 | % Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text.
|
---|
793 | %
|
---|
794 | \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
|
---|
795 | \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
|
---|
796 | \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
|
---|
797 | \def\html{\doignore{html}}
|
---|
798 | \def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
|
---|
799 | \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
|
---|
800 |
|
---|
801 | % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
|
---|
802 | % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
|
---|
803 | \let\dircategory = \comment
|
---|
804 |
|
---|
805 | % Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
|
---|
806 | %
|
---|
807 | \def\doignore#1{\begingroup
|
---|
808 | % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
|
---|
809 | \ignoresections
|
---|
810 | %
|
---|
811 | % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
|
---|
812 | % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
|
---|
813 | % this texinfo.tex file). We change the catcode of @ below to match.
|
---|
814 | \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
|
---|
815 | %
|
---|
816 | % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
|
---|
817 | \catcode32 = 10
|
---|
818 | %
|
---|
819 | % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
|
---|
820 | \catcode`\{ = 9
|
---|
821 | \catcode`\} = 9
|
---|
822 | %
|
---|
823 | % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
|
---|
824 | \catcode`\@ = 12
|
---|
825 | %
|
---|
826 | % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
|
---|
827 | % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
|
---|
828 | % @c @end ifinfo
|
---|
829 | % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
|
---|
830 | % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
|
---|
831 | \catcode`\c = 14
|
---|
832 | %
|
---|
833 | % And now expand that command.
|
---|
834 | \doignoretext
|
---|
835 | }
|
---|
836 |
|
---|
837 | % What we do to finish off ignored text.
|
---|
838 | %
|
---|
839 | \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
|
---|
840 |
|
---|
841 | \newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
|
---|
842 | \def\obstexwarn{%
|
---|
843 | \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
|
---|
844 | % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
|
---|
845 | % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
|
---|
846 | \immediate\write16{}
|
---|
847 | \immediate\write16{***WARNING*** for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
|
---|
848 | \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
|
---|
849 | \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
|
---|
850 | \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
|
---|
851 | \immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
|
---|
852 | \immediate\write16{ (See ftp://ftp.gnu.ai.mit.edu/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
|
---|
853 | \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
|
---|
854 | \immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
|
---|
855 | \immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.}
|
---|
856 | \immediate\write16{}
|
---|
857 | \global\warnedobstrue
|
---|
858 | \fi
|
---|
859 | }
|
---|
860 |
|
---|
861 | % **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a
|
---|
862 | % workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
|
---|
863 | % uncomment the following line:
|
---|
864 | %%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
|
---|
865 |
|
---|
866 | % Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
|
---|
867 | % purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
|
---|
868 | %
|
---|
869 | \def\nestedignore#1{%
|
---|
870 | \obstexwarn
|
---|
871 | % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
|
---|
872 | % command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the
|
---|
873 | % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize
|
---|
874 | % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
|
---|
875 | % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
|
---|
876 | %
|
---|
877 | \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
|
---|
878 | % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
|
---|
879 | \ignoresections
|
---|
880 | %
|
---|
881 | % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
|
---|
882 | % @end command again.
|
---|
883 | \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
|
---|
884 | %
|
---|
885 | % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no
|
---|
886 | % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
|
---|
887 | % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
|
---|
888 | % undefine them.
|
---|
889 | %
|
---|
890 | % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
|
---|
891 | % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
|
---|
892 | \ignoremorecommands
|
---|
893 | %
|
---|
894 | % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
|
---|
895 | % all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use
|
---|
896 | % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
|
---|
897 | % might have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still
|
---|
898 | % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
|
---|
899 | % stuff compared to the main input.
|
---|
900 | %
|
---|
901 | \nullfont
|
---|
902 | \let\tenrm = \nullfont \let\tenit = \nullfont \let\tensl = \nullfont
|
---|
903 | \let\tenbf = \nullfont \let\tentt = \nullfont \let\smallcaps = \nullfont
|
---|
904 | \let\tensf = \nullfont
|
---|
905 | % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in
|
---|
906 | % smallexample)
|
---|
907 | \let\indrm = \nullfont \let\indit = \nullfont \let\indsl = \nullfont
|
---|
908 | \let\indbf = \nullfont \let\indtt = \nullfont \let\indsc = \nullfont
|
---|
909 | \let\indsf = \nullfont
|
---|
910 | %
|
---|
911 | % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
|
---|
912 | \tracinglostchars = 0
|
---|
913 | %
|
---|
914 | % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
|
---|
915 | \frenchspacing
|
---|
916 | %
|
---|
917 | % Don't report underfull hboxes.
|
---|
918 | \hbadness = 10000
|
---|
919 | %
|
---|
920 | % Do minimal line-breaking.
|
---|
921 | \pretolerance = 10000
|
---|
922 | %
|
---|
923 | % Do not execute instructions in @tex
|
---|
924 | \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
|
---|
925 | % Do not execute macro definitions.
|
---|
926 | % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
|
---|
927 | \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
|
---|
928 | }
|
---|
929 |
|
---|
930 | % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
|
---|
931 | % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
|
---|
932 | %
|
---|
933 | % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
|
---|
934 | % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
|
---|
935 | % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
|
---|
936 | % didn't need it. Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
|
---|
937 | % losing inside @example, for instance.
|
---|
938 | %
|
---|
939 | \def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
|
---|
940 | \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
|
---|
941 | \parsearg\setxxx}
|
---|
942 | \def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
|
---|
943 | \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
|
---|
944 | \def\temp{#2}%
|
---|
945 | \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
|
---|
946 | \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
|
---|
947 | \fi
|
---|
948 | \endgroup
|
---|
949 | }
|
---|
950 | % Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
|
---|
951 | % \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
|
---|
952 | % an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
|
---|
953 | \def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
|
---|
954 |
|
---|
955 | % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
|
---|
956 | %
|
---|
957 | \def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
|
---|
958 | \def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
|
---|
959 |
|
---|
960 | % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
|
---|
961 | %
|
---|
962 | {
|
---|
963 | \catcode`\_ = \active
|
---|
964 | %
|
---|
965 | % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
|
---|
966 | % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}. So \let any
|
---|
967 | % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
|
---|
968 | \gdef\value{\begingroup
|
---|
969 | \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
|
---|
970 | \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
|
---|
971 | \valuexxx}
|
---|
972 | }
|
---|
973 | \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
|
---|
974 |
|
---|
975 | % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
|
---|
976 | % properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies). Ones
|
---|
977 | % whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
|
---|
978 | % about that. The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
|
---|
979 | % winds up in the index file. This means that if the variable's value
|
---|
980 | % contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
|
---|
981 | % (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
|
---|
982 | % one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
|
---|
983 | %
|
---|
984 | \def\expandablevalue#1{%
|
---|
985 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
---|
986 | {[No value for ``#1'']v}%
|
---|
987 | \else
|
---|
988 | \csname SET#1\endcsname
|
---|
989 | \fi
|
---|
990 | }
|
---|
991 |
|
---|
992 | % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
|
---|
993 | % with @set.
|
---|
994 | %
|
---|
995 | \def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
|
---|
996 | \def\ifsetxxx #1{%
|
---|
997 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
---|
998 | \expandafter\ifsetfail
|
---|
999 | \else
|
---|
1000 | \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
|
---|
1001 | \fi
|
---|
1002 | }
|
---|
1003 | \def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
|
---|
1004 | \def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
|
---|
1005 | \defineunmatchedend{ifset}
|
---|
1006 |
|
---|
1007 | % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
|
---|
1008 | % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
|
---|
1009 | %
|
---|
1010 | \def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
|
---|
1011 | \def\ifclearxxx #1{%
|
---|
1012 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
---|
1013 | \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
|
---|
1014 | \else
|
---|
1015 | \expandafter\ifclearfail
|
---|
1016 | \fi
|
---|
1017 | }
|
---|
1018 | \def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
|
---|
1019 | \def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
|
---|
1020 | \defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
|
---|
1021 |
|
---|
1022 | % @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text
|
---|
1023 | % following, through the first @end iftex (etc.). Make `@end iftex'
|
---|
1024 | % (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
|
---|
1025 | %
|
---|
1026 | \def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
|
---|
1027 | \def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
|
---|
1028 | \def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
|
---|
1029 | \defineunmatchedend{iftex}
|
---|
1030 | \defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
|
---|
1031 | \defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
|
---|
1032 |
|
---|
1033 | % We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it
|
---|
1034 | % at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
|
---|
1035 | % effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group). So we must
|
---|
1036 | % define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value. (We can't
|
---|
1037 | % just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
|
---|
1038 | % the @ifset might be nested.)
|
---|
1039 | %
|
---|
1040 | \def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
|
---|
1041 | \edef\temp{%
|
---|
1042 | % Remember the current value of \E#1.
|
---|
1043 | \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
|
---|
1044 | %
|
---|
1045 | % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
|
---|
1046 | \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
|
---|
1047 | }%
|
---|
1048 | \temp
|
---|
1049 | }
|
---|
1050 |
|
---|
1051 | % We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
|
---|
1052 | % control sequences after we've constructed them.
|
---|
1053 | %
|
---|
1054 | \def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
|
---|
1055 |
|
---|
1056 | % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
|
---|
1057 | %
|
---|
1058 | \def\asis#1{#1}
|
---|
1059 |
|
---|
1060 | % @math means output in math mode.
|
---|
1061 | % We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control
|
---|
1062 | % sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written. Then,
|
---|
1063 | % we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they
|
---|
1064 | % should be, according to the definition of Texinfo). So we must use a
|
---|
1065 | % control sequence to switch into and out of math mode.
|
---|
1066 | %
|
---|
1067 | % This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it
|
---|
1068 | % seems unlikely it will ever be needed there.
|
---|
1069 | %
|
---|
1070 | \let\implicitmath = $
|
---|
1071 | \def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath}
|
---|
1072 |
|
---|
1073 | % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
|
---|
1074 | \def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
|
---|
1075 | \def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
|
---|
1076 |
|
---|
1077 | % @refill is a no-op.
|
---|
1078 | \let\refill=\relax
|
---|
1079 |
|
---|
1080 | % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
|
---|
1081 | % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
|
---|
1082 | % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
|
---|
1083 | %
|
---|
1084 | \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
|
---|
1085 | \let\novalidate = \linksfalse
|
---|
1086 |
|
---|
1087 | % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
|
---|
1088 | % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
|
---|
1089 | % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
|
---|
1090 | \def\setfilename{%
|
---|
1091 | \iflinks
|
---|
1092 | \readauxfile
|
---|
1093 | \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
|
---|
1094 | \openindices
|
---|
1095 | \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
|
---|
1096 | \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
|
---|
1097 | %
|
---|
1098 | % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
|
---|
1099 | % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
|
---|
1100 | % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
|
---|
1101 | \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
|
---|
1102 | \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
|
---|
1103 | \closein1
|
---|
1104 | \temp
|
---|
1105 | %
|
---|
1106 | \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
|
---|
1107 | }
|
---|
1108 |
|
---|
1109 | % Called from \setfilename.
|
---|
1110 | %
|
---|
1111 | \def\openindices{%
|
---|
1112 | \newindex{cp}%
|
---|
1113 | \newcodeindex{fn}%
|
---|
1114 | \newcodeindex{vr}%
|
---|
1115 | \newcodeindex{tp}%
|
---|
1116 | \newcodeindex{ky}%
|
---|
1117 | \newcodeindex{pg}%
|
---|
1118 | }
|
---|
1119 |
|
---|
1120 | % @bye.
|
---|
1121 | \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
|
---|
1122 |
|
---|
1123 |
|
---|
1124 | \message{fonts,}
|
---|
1125 | % Font-change commands.
|
---|
1126 |
|
---|
1127 | % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
|
---|
1128 | % So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
|
---|
1129 | \newfam\sffam
|
---|
1130 | \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
|
---|
1131 | \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
|
---|
1132 |
|
---|
1133 | % We don't need math for this one.
|
---|
1134 | \def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
|
---|
1135 |
|
---|
1136 | % Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt).
|
---|
1137 | \newcount\mainmagstep
|
---|
1138 | \mainmagstep=\magstephalf
|
---|
1139 |
|
---|
1140 | % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
|
---|
1141 | % specified font prefix (normally `cm').
|
---|
1142 | % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
|
---|
1143 | \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
|
---|
1144 |
|
---|
1145 | % Use cm as the default font prefix.
|
---|
1146 | % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
|
---|
1147 | % before you read in texinfo.tex.
|
---|
1148 | \ifx\fontprefix\undefined
|
---|
1149 | \def\fontprefix{cm}
|
---|
1150 | \fi
|
---|
1151 | % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
|
---|
1152 | \def\rmshape{r}
|
---|
1153 | \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
|
---|
1154 | \def\bfshape{b}
|
---|
1155 | \def\bxshape{bx}
|
---|
1156 | \def\ttshape{tt}
|
---|
1157 | \def\ttbshape{tt}
|
---|
1158 | \def\ttslshape{sltt}
|
---|
1159 | \def\itshape{ti}
|
---|
1160 | \def\itbshape{bxti}
|
---|
1161 | \def\slshape{sl}
|
---|
1162 | \def\slbshape{bxsl}
|
---|
1163 | \def\sfshape{ss}
|
---|
1164 | \def\sfbshape{ss}
|
---|
1165 | \def\scshape{csc}
|
---|
1166 | \def\scbshape{csc}
|
---|
1167 |
|
---|
1168 | \ifx\bigger\relax
|
---|
1169 | \let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
|
---|
1170 | \setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
|
---|
1171 | \setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
|
---|
1172 | \else
|
---|
1173 | \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
---|
1174 | \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
---|
1175 | \fi
|
---|
1176 | % Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
|
---|
1177 | % cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
|
---|
1178 | % looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
|
---|
1179 | \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
---|
1180 | \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
---|
1181 | \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
---|
1182 | \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
---|
1183 | \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
---|
1184 | \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
---|
1185 | \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
---|
1186 | \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
---|
1187 |
|
---|
1188 | % A few fonts for @defun, etc.
|
---|
1189 | \setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
|
---|
1190 | \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
---|
1191 | \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
|
---|
1192 |
|
---|
1193 | % Fonts for indices and small examples (9pt).
|
---|
1194 | % We actually use the slanted font rather than the italic,
|
---|
1195 | % because texinfo normally uses the slanted fonts for that.
|
---|
1196 | % Do not make many font distinctions in general in the index, since they
|
---|
1197 | % aren't very useful.
|
---|
1198 | \setfont\ninett\ttshape{9}{1000}
|
---|
1199 | \setfont\ninettsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
|
---|
1200 | \setfont\indrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
|
---|
1201 | \setfont\indit\itshape{9}{1000}
|
---|
1202 | \setfont\indsl\slshape{9}{1000}
|
---|
1203 | \let\indtt=\ninett
|
---|
1204 | \let\indttsl=\ninettsl
|
---|
1205 | \let\indsf=\indrm
|
---|
1206 | \let\indbf=\indrm
|
---|
1207 | \setfont\indsc\scshape{10}{900}
|
---|
1208 | \font\indi=cmmi9
|
---|
1209 | \font\indsy=cmsy9
|
---|
1210 |
|
---|
1211 | % Fonts for title page:
|
---|
1212 | \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
|
---|
1213 | \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
---|
1214 | \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
---|
1215 | \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
|
---|
1216 | \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
---|
1217 | \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
|
---|
1218 | \let\titlebf=\titlerm
|
---|
1219 | \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
---|
1220 | \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
|
---|
1221 | \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
|
---|
1222 | \def\authorrm{\secrm}
|
---|
1223 |
|
---|
1224 | % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
|
---|
1225 | \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
|
---|
1226 | \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
---|
1227 | \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
---|
1228 | \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
|
---|
1229 | \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
---|
1230 | \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
|
---|
1231 | \let\chapbf=\chaprm
|
---|
1232 | \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
---|
1233 | \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
|
---|
1234 | \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
|
---|
1235 |
|
---|
1236 | % Section fonts (14.4pt).
|
---|
1237 | \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
|
---|
1238 | \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
---|
1239 | \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
---|
1240 | \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
|
---|
1241 | \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
---|
1242 | \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
|
---|
1243 | \let\secbf\secrm
|
---|
1244 | \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
---|
1245 | \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
|
---|
1246 | \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
|
---|
1247 |
|
---|
1248 | % \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} % This size an font looked bad.
|
---|
1249 | % \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1} % The letters were too crowded.
|
---|
1250 | % \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
---|
1251 | % \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
---|
1252 | % \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
---|
1253 |
|
---|
1254 | %\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315} % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx.
|
---|
1255 | %\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315} % Also, the size is a little larger than
|
---|
1256 | %\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315} % being scaled magstep1.
|
---|
1257 | %\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315}
|
---|
1258 | %\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315}
|
---|
1259 |
|
---|
1260 | %\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm
|
---|
1261 |
|
---|
1262 | % Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
|
---|
1263 | \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
|
---|
1264 | \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
|
---|
1265 | \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
|
---|
1266 | \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
|
---|
1267 | \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
|
---|
1268 | \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
|
---|
1269 | \let\ssecbf\ssecrm
|
---|
1270 | \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
---|
1271 | \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
|
---|
1272 | \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
|
---|
1273 | % The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
|
---|
1274 | % but that is not a standard magnification.
|
---|
1275 |
|
---|
1276 | % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
|
---|
1277 | % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
|
---|
1278 | % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we
|
---|
1279 | % don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would
|
---|
1280 | % also require loading a lot more fonts).
|
---|
1281 | %
|
---|
1282 | \def\resetmathfonts{%
|
---|
1283 | \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy
|
---|
1284 | \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf
|
---|
1285 | \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf
|
---|
1286 | }
|
---|
1287 |
|
---|
1288 |
|
---|
1289 | % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
|
---|
1290 | % of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work
|
---|
1291 | % in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
|
---|
1292 | % cases, not the current font. Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
|
---|
1293 | % \tenbf}, for example. By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
|
---|
1294 | % redefine \bf itself.
|
---|
1295 | \def\textfonts{%
|
---|
1296 | \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
|
---|
1297 | \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
|
---|
1298 | \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
|
---|
1299 | \resetmathfonts}
|
---|
1300 | \def\titlefonts{%
|
---|
1301 | \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
|
---|
1302 | \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
|
---|
1303 | \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
|
---|
1304 | \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
|
---|
1305 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
|
---|
1306 | \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
|
---|
1307 | \def\chapfonts{%
|
---|
1308 | \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
|
---|
1309 | \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
|
---|
1310 | \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
|
---|
1311 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
|
---|
1312 | \def\secfonts{%
|
---|
1313 | \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
|
---|
1314 | \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
|
---|
1315 | \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
|
---|
1316 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
|
---|
1317 | \def\subsecfonts{%
|
---|
1318 | \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
|
---|
1319 | \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
|
---|
1320 | \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
|
---|
1321 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
|
---|
1322 | \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
|
---|
1323 | \def\indexfonts{%
|
---|
1324 | \let\tenrm=\indrm \let\tenit=\indit \let\tensl=\indsl
|
---|
1325 | \let\tenbf=\indbf \let\tentt=\indtt \let\smallcaps=\indsc
|
---|
1326 | \let\tensf=\indsf \let\teni=\indi \let\tensy=\indsy \let\tenttsl=\indttsl
|
---|
1327 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{12pt}}
|
---|
1328 |
|
---|
1329 | % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
|
---|
1330 | %
|
---|
1331 | \textfonts
|
---|
1332 |
|
---|
1333 | % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
|
---|
1334 | \def\angleleft{$\langle$}
|
---|
1335 | \def\angleright{$\rangle$}
|
---|
1336 |
|
---|
1337 | % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
|
---|
1338 | \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
|
---|
1339 |
|
---|
1340 | % Fonts for short table of contents.
|
---|
1341 | \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
|
---|
1342 | \setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
|
---|
1343 | \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
|
---|
1344 |
|
---|
1345 | %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
|
---|
1346 | %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
|
---|
1347 |
|
---|
1348 | % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
|
---|
1349 | % unless the following character is such as not to need one.
|
---|
1350 | \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
|
---|
1351 | \def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
---|
1352 | \def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
---|
1353 |
|
---|
1354 | \let\i=\smartitalic
|
---|
1355 | \let\var=\smartslanted
|
---|
1356 | \let\dfn=\smartslanted
|
---|
1357 | \let\emph=\smartitalic
|
---|
1358 | \let\cite=\smartslanted
|
---|
1359 |
|
---|
1360 | \def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
|
---|
1361 | \let\strong=\b
|
---|
1362 |
|
---|
1363 | % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
|
---|
1364 | % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
|
---|
1365 | % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
|
---|
1366 | %
|
---|
1367 | \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
|
---|
1368 | \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
|
---|
1369 |
|
---|
1370 | \def\t#1{%
|
---|
1371 | {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
|
---|
1372 | \null
|
---|
1373 | }
|
---|
1374 | \let\ttfont=\t
|
---|
1375 | \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
|
---|
1376 | \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
|
---|
1377 | \font\smallsy=cmsy9
|
---|
1378 | \def\key#1{{\smallrm\textfont2=\smallsy \leavevmode\hbox{%
|
---|
1379 | \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
|
---|
1380 | \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
|
---|
1381 | \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
|
---|
1382 | \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
|
---|
1383 | \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
|
---|
1384 | % The old definition, with no lozenge:
|
---|
1385 | %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
|
---|
1386 | \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
|
---|
1387 |
|
---|
1388 | % @file, @option are the same as @samp.
|
---|
1389 | \let\file=\samp
|
---|
1390 | \let\option=\samp
|
---|
1391 |
|
---|
1392 | % @code is a modification of @t,
|
---|
1393 | % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
|
---|
1394 | \def\tclose#1{%
|
---|
1395 | {%
|
---|
1396 | % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
|
---|
1397 | \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
|
---|
1398 | %
|
---|
1399 | % Switch to typewriter.
|
---|
1400 | \tt
|
---|
1401 | %
|
---|
1402 | % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
|
---|
1403 | \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
|
---|
1404 | %
|
---|
1405 | % Turn off hyphenation.
|
---|
1406 | \nohyphenation
|
---|
1407 | %
|
---|
1408 | \rawbackslash
|
---|
1409 | \frenchspacing
|
---|
1410 | #1%
|
---|
1411 | }%
|
---|
1412 | \null
|
---|
1413 | }
|
---|
1414 |
|
---|
1415 | % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
|
---|
1416 | % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
|
---|
1417 | % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
|
---|
1418 |
|
---|
1419 | % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
|
---|
1420 | % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
|
---|
1421 | % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
|
---|
1422 | % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
|
---|
1423 | % -- rms.
|
---|
1424 | {
|
---|
1425 | \catcode`\-=\active
|
---|
1426 | \catcode`\_=\active
|
---|
1427 | %
|
---|
1428 | \global\def\code{\begingroup
|
---|
1429 | \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
|
---|
1430 | \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
|
---|
1431 | \codex
|
---|
1432 | }
|
---|
1433 | %
|
---|
1434 | % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
|
---|
1435 | % just treat them as a normal -.
|
---|
1436 | \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
|
---|
1437 | }
|
---|
1438 |
|
---|
1439 | \def\realdash{-}
|
---|
1440 | \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
|
---|
1441 | \def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}}
|
---|
1442 | \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
|
---|
1443 |
|
---|
1444 | %\let\exp=\tclose %Was temporary
|
---|
1445 |
|
---|
1446 | % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
|
---|
1447 | % then @kbd has no effect.
|
---|
1448 |
|
---|
1449 | % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
|
---|
1450 | % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
|
---|
1451 | % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
|
---|
1452 | \def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
|
---|
1453 | \def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
|
---|
1454 | \def\arg{#1}%
|
---|
1455 | \ifx\arg\worddistinct
|
---|
1456 | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
|
---|
1457 | \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
|
---|
1458 | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
---|
1459 | \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
|
---|
1460 | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
---|
1461 | \fi\fi\fi
|
---|
1462 | }
|
---|
1463 | \def\worddistinct{distinct}
|
---|
1464 | \def\wordexample{example}
|
---|
1465 | \def\wordcode{code}
|
---|
1466 |
|
---|
1467 | % Default is kbdinputdistinct. (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
|
---|
1468 | % the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
|
---|
1469 | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
|
---|
1470 |
|
---|
1471 | \def\xkey{\key}
|
---|
1472 | \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
|
---|
1473 | \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
|
---|
1474 | \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
|
---|
1475 | \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
|
---|
1476 |
|
---|
1477 | % For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
|
---|
1478 | \let\url=\code
|
---|
1479 | \let\env=\code
|
---|
1480 | \let\command=\code
|
---|
1481 |
|
---|
1482 | % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional second argument
|
---|
1483 | % specifying the text to display. First (mandatory) arg is the url.
|
---|
1484 | % Perhaps eventually put in a hypertex \special here.
|
---|
1485 | %
|
---|
1486 | \def\uref#1{\urefxxx #1,,\finish}
|
---|
1487 | \def\urefxxx#1,#2,#3\finish{%
|
---|
1488 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
---|
1489 | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
---|
1490 | \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})%
|
---|
1491 | \else
|
---|
1492 | \code{#1}%
|
---|
1493 | \fi
|
---|
1494 | }
|
---|
1495 |
|
---|
1496 | % rms does not like the angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
|
---|
1497 | % So now @email is just like @uref.
|
---|
1498 | %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
|
---|
1499 | \let\email=\uref
|
---|
1500 |
|
---|
1501 | % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
|
---|
1502 | % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
|
---|
1503 | % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
|
---|
1504 | % this property, we can check that font parameter.
|
---|
1505 | %
|
---|
1506 | \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
|
---|
1507 |
|
---|
1508 | % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
|
---|
1509 | % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
|
---|
1510 | %
|
---|
1511 | \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
|
---|
1512 |
|
---|
1513 | \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
|
---|
1514 |
|
---|
1515 | % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
|
---|
1516 | % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
|
---|
1517 | % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
|
---|
1518 | %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
|
---|
1519 |
|
---|
1520 | % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
|
---|
1521 | \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
|
---|
1522 | \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
|
---|
1523 | \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
|
---|
1524 |
|
---|
1525 | % @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
|
---|
1526 | \def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
|
---|
1527 |
|
---|
1528 | % @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
|
---|
1529 | \def\pounds{{\it\$}}
|
---|
1530 |
|
---|
1531 |
|
---|
1532 | \message{page headings,}
|
---|
1533 |
|
---|
1534 | \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
|
---|
1535 | \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
|
---|
1536 |
|
---|
1537 | % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
|
---|
1538 | \newif\ifseenauthor
|
---|
1539 | \newif\iffinishedtitlepage
|
---|
1540 |
|
---|
1541 | % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
|
---|
1542 | % user says @contentsaftertitlepage or @shortcontentsaftertitlepage.
|
---|
1543 | %
|
---|
1544 | \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
|
---|
1545 | \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
|
---|
1546 | \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
|
---|
1547 | \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
|
---|
1548 |
|
---|
1549 | \def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
|
---|
1550 | \def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
|
---|
1551 | \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
|
---|
1552 |
|
---|
1553 | \def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
|
---|
1554 | \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
|
---|
1555 | \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
|
---|
1556 | %
|
---|
1557 | \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
|
---|
1558 | %
|
---|
1559 | % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
|
---|
1560 | \vglue\titlepagetopglue
|
---|
1561 | %
|
---|
1562 | % Now you can print the title using @title.
|
---|
1563 | \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
|
---|
1564 | \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
|
---|
1565 | % print a rule at the page bottom also.
|
---|
1566 | \finishedtitlepagefalse
|
---|
1567 | \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
|
---|
1568 | % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
|
---|
1569 | \finishedtitlepagetrue
|
---|
1570 | %
|
---|
1571 | % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
|
---|
1572 | \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
|
---|
1573 | \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
|
---|
1574 | %
|
---|
1575 | % @author should come last, but may come many times.
|
---|
1576 | \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
|
---|
1577 | \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
|
---|
1578 | {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
|
---|
1579 | %
|
---|
1580 | % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
|
---|
1581 | % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
|
---|
1582 | \let\oldpage = \page
|
---|
1583 | \def\page{%
|
---|
1584 | \iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
---|
1585 | \finishtitlepage
|
---|
1586 | \fi
|
---|
1587 | \oldpage
|
---|
1588 | \let\page = \oldpage
|
---|
1589 | \hbox{}}%
|
---|
1590 | % \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
|
---|
1591 | }
|
---|
1592 |
|
---|
1593 | \def\Etitlepage{%
|
---|
1594 | \iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
---|
1595 | \finishtitlepage
|
---|
1596 | \fi
|
---|
1597 | % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
|
---|
1598 | % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
|
---|
1599 | % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
|
---|
1600 | % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
|
---|
1601 | \oldpage
|
---|
1602 | \endgroup
|
---|
1603 | %
|
---|
1604 | % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
|
---|
1605 | \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
|
---|
1606 | \shortcontents
|
---|
1607 | \contents
|
---|
1608 | \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
|
---|
1609 | \global\let\contents = \relax
|
---|
1610 | \fi
|
---|
1611 | %
|
---|
1612 | \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
|
---|
1613 | \contents
|
---|
1614 | \global\let\contents = \relax
|
---|
1615 | \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
|
---|
1616 | \fi
|
---|
1617 | %
|
---|
1618 | \HEADINGSon
|
---|
1619 | }
|
---|
1620 |
|
---|
1621 | \def\finishtitlepage{%
|
---|
1622 | \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
|
---|
1623 | \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
|
---|
1624 | \finishedtitlepagetrue
|
---|
1625 | }
|
---|
1626 |
|
---|
1627 | %%% Set up page headings and footings.
|
---|
1628 |
|
---|
1629 | \let\thispage=\folio
|
---|
1630 |
|
---|
1631 | \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
|
---|
1632 | \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
|
---|
1633 | \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
|
---|
1634 | \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
|
---|
1635 |
|
---|
1636 | % Now make Tex use those variables
|
---|
1637 | \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
|
---|
1638 | \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
|
---|
1639 | \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
|
---|
1640 | \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
|
---|
1641 | \let\HEADINGShook=\relax
|
---|
1642 |
|
---|
1643 | % Commands to set those variables.
|
---|
1644 | % For example, this is what @headings on does
|
---|
1645 | % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
|
---|
1646 | % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
|
---|
1647 | % @evenfooting @thisfile||
|
---|
1648 | % @oddfooting ||@thisfile
|
---|
1649 |
|
---|
1650 | \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
|
---|
1651 | \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
|
---|
1652 | \def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
|
---|
1653 |
|
---|
1654 | \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
|
---|
1655 | \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
|
---|
1656 | \def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
|
---|
1657 |
|
---|
1658 | {\catcode`\@=0 %
|
---|
1659 |
|
---|
1660 | \gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
|
---|
1661 | \gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
|
---|
1662 | \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
---|
1663 |
|
---|
1664 | \gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
|
---|
1665 | \gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
|
---|
1666 | \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
---|
1667 |
|
---|
1668 | \gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
|
---|
1669 |
|
---|
1670 | \gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
|
---|
1671 | \gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
|
---|
1672 | \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
---|
1673 |
|
---|
1674 | \gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
|
---|
1675 | \gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
|
---|
1676 | \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
|
---|
1677 | %
|
---|
1678 | % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
|
---|
1679 | % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
|
---|
1680 | \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
|
---|
1681 | \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
|
---|
1682 | }
|
---|
1683 |
|
---|
1684 | \gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
|
---|
1685 | %
|
---|
1686 | }% unbind the catcode of @.
|
---|
1687 |
|
---|
1688 | % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
|
---|
1689 | % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
|
---|
1690 | % @headings off turns them off.
|
---|
1691 | % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
|
---|
1692 | % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
---|
1693 | % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
---|
1694 | % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
|
---|
1695 | % By default, they are off at the start of a document,
|
---|
1696 | % and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
|
---|
1697 |
|
---|
1698 | \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
|
---|
1699 |
|
---|
1700 | \def\HEADINGSoff{
|
---|
1701 | \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
---|
1702 | \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
|
---|
1703 | \HEADINGSoff
|
---|
1704 | % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
|
---|
1705 | % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
|
---|
1706 | % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
|
---|
1707 | % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
|
---|
1708 | % edge of all pages.
|
---|
1709 | \def\HEADINGSdouble{
|
---|
1710 | \global\pageno=1
|
---|
1711 | \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
---|
1712 | \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
---|
1713 | \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
---|
1714 | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
---|
1715 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
---|
1716 | }
|
---|
1717 | \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
---|
1718 |
|
---|
1719 | % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
|
---|
1720 | % page number on top right.
|
---|
1721 | \def\HEADINGSsingle{
|
---|
1722 | \global\pageno=1
|
---|
1723 | \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
---|
1724 | \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
---|
1725 | \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
---|
1726 | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
---|
1727 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
---|
1728 | }
|
---|
1729 | \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
|
---|
1730 |
|
---|
1731 | \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
|
---|
1732 | \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
|
---|
1733 | \def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
|
---|
1734 | \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
---|
1735 | \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
---|
1736 | \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
---|
1737 | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
---|
1738 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
---|
1739 | }
|
---|
1740 |
|
---|
1741 | \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
|
---|
1742 | \def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
|
---|
1743 | \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
---|
1744 | \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
---|
1745 | \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
---|
1746 | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
---|
1747 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
---|
1748 | }
|
---|
1749 |
|
---|
1750 | % Subroutines used in generating headings
|
---|
1751 | % Produces Day Month Year style of output.
|
---|
1752 | \def\today{\number\day\space
|
---|
1753 | \ifcase\month\or
|
---|
1754 | January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
|
---|
1755 | July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
|
---|
1756 | \space\number\year}
|
---|
1757 |
|
---|
1758 | % Use this if you want the Month Day, Year style of output.
|
---|
1759 | %\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
|
---|
1760 | %January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
|
---|
1761 | %July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
|
---|
1762 | %\space\number\day, \number\year}
|
---|
1763 |
|
---|
1764 | % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings
|
---|
1765 | % It generates no output of its own
|
---|
1766 |
|
---|
1767 | \def\thistitle{No Title}
|
---|
1768 | \def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
|
---|
1769 | \def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
|
---|
1770 |
|
---|
1771 |
|
---|
1772 | \message{tables,}
|
---|
1773 | % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
|
---|
1774 |
|
---|
1775 | % default indentation of table text
|
---|
1776 | \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
|
---|
1777 | % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
|
---|
1778 | \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
|
---|
1779 | % margin between end of table item and start of table text.
|
---|
1780 | \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
|
---|
1781 |
|
---|
1782 | % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
|
---|
1783 | \newdimen\itemmax
|
---|
1784 |
|
---|
1785 | % Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
|
---|
1786 | % these defs.
|
---|
1787 | % They also define \itemindex
|
---|
1788 | % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
|
---|
1789 |
|
---|
1790 | \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
|
---|
1791 |
|
---|
1792 | \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
|
---|
1793 |
|
---|
1794 | \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
---|
1795 | \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
---|
1796 |
|
---|
1797 | \def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
|
---|
1798 | \def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
|
---|
1799 |
|
---|
1800 | \def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
|
---|
1801 | \def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
|
---|
1802 |
|
---|
1803 | \def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
|
---|
1804 | \itemzzz {#1}}
|
---|
1805 |
|
---|
1806 | \def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
|
---|
1807 | \itemzzz {#1}}
|
---|
1808 |
|
---|
1809 | \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
|
---|
1810 | \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
---|
1811 | \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
|
---|
1812 | \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
|
---|
1813 | \itemindex{#1}%
|
---|
1814 | \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
|
---|
1815 | %
|
---|
1816 | % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
|
---|
1817 | % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
|
---|
1818 | % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
|
---|
1819 | % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
|
---|
1820 | % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
|
---|
1821 | \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
|
---|
1822 | %
|
---|
1823 | % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
|
---|
1824 | % but leave it ragged-right.
|
---|
1825 | \begingroup
|
---|
1826 | \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
|
---|
1827 | \advance\hsize by\tableindent
|
---|
1828 | \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
|
---|
1829 | \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
|
---|
1830 | \endgroup
|
---|
1831 | %
|
---|
1832 | % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
|
---|
1833 | % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
|
---|
1834 | \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
|
---|
1835 | %
|
---|
1836 | % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. Unfortunately
|
---|
1837 | % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
|
---|
1838 | % \baselineskip glue.
|
---|
1839 | \nobreak
|
---|
1840 | \endgroup
|
---|
1841 | \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
|
---|
1842 | \else
|
---|
1843 | % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
|
---|
1844 | % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
|
---|
1845 | \noindent
|
---|
1846 | % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
|
---|
1847 | % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
|
---|
1848 | % eventually be printed.
|
---|
1849 | \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
|
---|
1850 | \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
|
---|
1851 | \unhbox0
|
---|
1852 | \nobreak\kern\dimen0
|
---|
1853 | \endgroup
|
---|
1854 | \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
|
---|
1855 | \fi
|
---|
1856 | }
|
---|
1857 |
|
---|
1858 | \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
|
---|
1859 | \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
|
---|
1860 | \def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
|
---|
1861 | \def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
|
---|
1862 | \def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
|
---|
1863 | \def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
|
---|
1864 |
|
---|
1865 | % Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
|
---|
1866 | \def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
|
---|
1867 |
|
---|
1868 | % @table, @ftable, @vtable.
|
---|
1869 | \def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
|
---|
1870 | {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
|
---|
1871 | \gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
|
---|
1872 | \tabley\dontindex#1 \endtabley}}
|
---|
1873 |
|
---|
1874 | \def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
|
---|
1875 | {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
|
---|
1876 | \gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
|
---|
1877 | \tabley\fnitemindex#1 \endtabley
|
---|
1878 | \def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
|
---|
1879 | \let\Etable=\relax}}
|
---|
1880 |
|
---|
1881 | \def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
|
---|
1882 | {\obeylines\obeyspaces%
|
---|
1883 | \gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
|
---|
1884 | \tabley\vritemindex#1 \endtabley
|
---|
1885 | \def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
|
---|
1886 | \let\Etable=\relax}}
|
---|
1887 |
|
---|
1888 | \def\dontindex #1{}
|
---|
1889 | \def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
|
---|
1890 | \def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
|
---|
1891 |
|
---|
1892 | {\obeyspaces %
|
---|
1893 | \gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
|
---|
1894 | \tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
|
---|
1895 |
|
---|
1896 | \def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
|
---|
1897 | \aboveenvbreak %
|
---|
1898 | \begingroup %
|
---|
1899 | \def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
|
---|
1900 | \let\itemindex=#1%
|
---|
1901 | \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
|
---|
1902 | \ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
|
---|
1903 | \ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
|
---|
1904 | \def\itemfont{#2}%
|
---|
1905 | \itemmax=\tableindent %
|
---|
1906 | \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
|
---|
1907 | \advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
|
---|
1908 | \exdentamount=\tableindent
|
---|
1909 | \parindent = 0pt
|
---|
1910 | \parskip = \smallskipamount
|
---|
1911 | \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
|
---|
1912 | \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
|
---|
1913 | \let\item = \internalBitem %
|
---|
1914 | \let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
|
---|
1915 | \let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
|
---|
1916 | \let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
|
---|
1917 | \let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
|
---|
1918 | \let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
|
---|
1919 | }
|
---|
1920 |
|
---|
1921 | % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
|
---|
1922 |
|
---|
1923 | \newcount \itemno
|
---|
1924 |
|
---|
1925 | \def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
|
---|
1926 |
|
---|
1927 | \def\itemizezzz #1{%
|
---|
1928 | \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
|
---|
1929 | \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
|
---|
1930 | }
|
---|
1931 |
|
---|
1932 | \def\itemizey #1#2{%
|
---|
1933 | \aboveenvbreak %
|
---|
1934 | \itemmax=\itemindent %
|
---|
1935 | \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
|
---|
1936 | \advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
|
---|
1937 | \exdentamount=\itemindent
|
---|
1938 | \parindent = 0pt %
|
---|
1939 | \parskip = \smallskipamount %
|
---|
1940 | \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
|
---|
1941 | \def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
|
---|
1942 | \def\itemcontents{#1}%
|
---|
1943 | \let\item=\itemizeitem}
|
---|
1944 |
|
---|
1945 | % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
|
---|
1946 | % These are `.?!:;,'
|
---|
1947 | \def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
|
---|
1948 | \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
|
---|
1949 |
|
---|
1950 | % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
|
---|
1951 | % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
|
---|
1952 | %
|
---|
1953 | \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
|
---|
1954 |
|
---|
1955 | % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
|
---|
1956 | % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
|
---|
1957 | % argument is the same as `1'.
|
---|
1958 | %
|
---|
1959 | \def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
|
---|
1960 | \def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
|
---|
1961 | \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
|
---|
1962 | \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
|
---|
1963 | %
|
---|
1964 | % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
|
---|
1965 | \def\thearg{#1}%
|
---|
1966 | \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
|
---|
1967 | %
|
---|
1968 | % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
|
---|
1969 | % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
|
---|
1970 | % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
|
---|
1971 | % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
|
---|
1972 | % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
|
---|
1973 | \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
|
---|
1974 | \ifx\rest\empty
|
---|
1975 | % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
|
---|
1976 | % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
|
---|
1977 | % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
|
---|
1978 | % not equal to itself.
|
---|
1979 | % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
|
---|
1980 | %
|
---|
1981 | % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
|
---|
1982 | % continuing to look for a <number>.
|
---|
1983 | %
|
---|
1984 | \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
|
---|
1985 | \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
|
---|
1986 | \else
|
---|
1987 | % It's a letter.
|
---|
1988 | \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
|
---|
1989 | \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
|
---|
1990 | \else
|
---|
1991 | \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
|
---|
1992 | \fi
|
---|
1993 | \fi
|
---|
1994 | \else
|
---|
1995 | % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
|
---|
1996 | \numericenumerate
|
---|
1997 | \fi
|
---|
1998 | }
|
---|
1999 |
|
---|
2000 | % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
|
---|
2001 | % given in \thearg.
|
---|
2002 | %
|
---|
2003 | \def\numericenumerate{%
|
---|
2004 | \itemno = \thearg
|
---|
2005 | \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
|
---|
2006 | }
|
---|
2007 |
|
---|
2008 | % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
---|
2009 | \def\lowercaseenumerate{%
|
---|
2010 | \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
---|
2011 | \startenumeration{%
|
---|
2012 | % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
---|
2013 | \ifnum\itemno=0
|
---|
2014 | \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
---|
2015 | alphabet}%
|
---|
2016 | \fi
|
---|
2017 | \char\lccode\itemno
|
---|
2018 | }%
|
---|
2019 | }
|
---|
2020 |
|
---|
2021 | % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
---|
2022 | \def\uppercaseenumerate{%
|
---|
2023 | \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
---|
2024 | \startenumeration{%
|
---|
2025 | % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
---|
2026 | \ifnum\itemno=0
|
---|
2027 | \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
---|
2028 | alphabet}
|
---|
2029 | \fi
|
---|
2030 | \char\uccode\itemno
|
---|
2031 | }%
|
---|
2032 | }
|
---|
2033 |
|
---|
2034 | % Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
|
---|
2035 | % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
|
---|
2036 | % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
|
---|
2037 | %
|
---|
2038 | \def\startenumeration#1{%
|
---|
2039 | \advance\itemno by -1
|
---|
2040 | \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
|
---|
2041 | }
|
---|
2042 |
|
---|
2043 | % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
|
---|
2044 | % to @enumerate.
|
---|
2045 | %
|
---|
2046 | \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
|
---|
2047 | \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
|
---|
2048 | \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
---|
2049 | \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
---|
2050 |
|
---|
2051 | % Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
|
---|
2052 |
|
---|
2053 | \def\itemizeitem{%
|
---|
2054 | \advance\itemno by 1
|
---|
2055 | {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
|
---|
2056 | \ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
|
---|
2057 | {\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
|
---|
2058 | \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
|
---|
2059 | \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
|
---|
2060 | \flushcr}
|
---|
2061 |
|
---|
2062 | % @multitable macros
|
---|
2063 | % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
|
---|
2064 | %
|
---|
2065 | % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
|
---|
2066 | % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
|
---|
2067 | % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
|
---|
2068 | % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
|
---|
2069 |
|
---|
2070 | % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
|
---|
2071 |
|
---|
2072 | % To make preamble:
|
---|
2073 | %
|
---|
2074 | % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
|
---|
2075 | % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
|
---|
2076 | % @item ...
|
---|
2077 | %
|
---|
2078 | % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
|
---|
2079 | % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
|
---|
2080 | % columns as desired.
|
---|
2081 |
|
---|
2082 |
|
---|
2083 | % Or use a template:
|
---|
2084 | % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
---|
2085 | % @item ...
|
---|
2086 | % using the widest term desired in each column.
|
---|
2087 | %
|
---|
2088 | % For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
|
---|
2089 | % the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
|
---|
2090 | % will parse correctly, i.e.,
|
---|
2091 | %
|
---|
2092 | % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
|
---|
2093 | % template}
|
---|
2094 | % Not:
|
---|
2095 | % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
|
---|
2096 | % {Column 3 template}
|
---|
2097 |
|
---|
2098 | % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
|
---|
2099 | % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
|
---|
2100 | % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
|
---|
2101 | % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
|
---|
2102 |
|
---|
2103 | % @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
|
---|
2104 | % own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
|
---|
2105 |
|
---|
2106 | % Sample multitable:
|
---|
2107 |
|
---|
2108 | % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
---|
2109 | % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
|
---|
2110 | % @item
|
---|
2111 | % first col stuff
|
---|
2112 | % @tab
|
---|
2113 | % second col stuff
|
---|
2114 | % @tab
|
---|
2115 | % third col
|
---|
2116 | % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
|
---|
2117 | % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
|
---|
2118 | %
|
---|
2119 | % They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
|
---|
2120 | % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
|
---|
2121 | % @end multitable
|
---|
2122 |
|
---|
2123 | % Default dimensions may be reset by user.
|
---|
2124 | % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
|
---|
2125 | % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
|
---|
2126 | % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
|
---|
2127 | % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
|
---|
2128 | % to baseline.
|
---|
2129 | % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
|
---|
2130 | %
|
---|
2131 | \newskip\multitableparskip
|
---|
2132 | \newskip\multitableparindent
|
---|
2133 | \newdimen\multitablecolspace
|
---|
2134 | \newskip\multitablelinespace
|
---|
2135 | \multitableparskip=0pt
|
---|
2136 | \multitableparindent=6pt
|
---|
2137 | \multitablecolspace=12pt
|
---|
2138 | \multitablelinespace=0pt
|
---|
2139 |
|
---|
2140 | % Macros used to set up halign preamble:
|
---|
2141 | %
|
---|
2142 | \let\endsetuptable\relax
|
---|
2143 | \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
|
---|
2144 | \let\columnfractions\relax
|
---|
2145 | \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
|
---|
2146 | \newif\ifsetpercent
|
---|
2147 |
|
---|
2148 | % 2/1/96, to allow fractions to be given with more than one digit.
|
---|
2149 | \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {\global\advance\colcount by1 %
|
---|
2150 | \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#1\hsize}%
|
---|
2151 | \setuptable}
|
---|
2152 |
|
---|
2153 | \newcount\colcount
|
---|
2154 | \def\setuptable#1{\def\firstarg{#1}%
|
---|
2155 | \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable\let\go\relax%
|
---|
2156 | \else
|
---|
2157 | \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions\global\setpercenttrue%
|
---|
2158 | \else
|
---|
2159 | \ifsetpercent
|
---|
2160 | \let\go\pickupwholefraction % In this case arg of setuptable
|
---|
2161 | % is the decimal point before the
|
---|
2162 | % number given in percent of hsize.
|
---|
2163 | % We don't need this so we don't use it.
|
---|
2164 | \else
|
---|
2165 | \global\advance\colcount by1
|
---|
2166 | \setbox0=\hbox{#1 }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
|
---|
2167 | % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
|
---|
2168 | \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
|
---|
2169 | \fi%
|
---|
2170 | \fi%
|
---|
2171 | \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction\else\let\go\setuptable\fi%
|
---|
2172 | \fi\go}
|
---|
2173 |
|
---|
2174 | % multitable syntax
|
---|
2175 | \def\tab{&\hskip1sp\relax} % 2/2/96
|
---|
2176 | % tiny skip here makes sure this column space is
|
---|
2177 | % maintained, even if it is never used.
|
---|
2178 |
|
---|
2179 | % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
|
---|
2180 |
|
---|
2181 | \def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
|
---|
2182 | \def\dotable#1{\bgroup
|
---|
2183 | \vskip\parskip
|
---|
2184 | \let\item\crcr
|
---|
2185 | \tolerance=9500
|
---|
2186 | \hbadness=9500
|
---|
2187 | \setmultitablespacing
|
---|
2188 | \parskip=\multitableparskip
|
---|
2189 | \parindent=\multitableparindent
|
---|
2190 | \overfullrule=0pt
|
---|
2191 | \global\colcount=0
|
---|
2192 | \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
|
---|
2193 | %
|
---|
2194 | % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
|
---|
2195 | \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
|
---|
2196 | %
|
---|
2197 | % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
|
---|
2198 | % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
|
---|
2199 | % The table preamble
|
---|
2200 | % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
|
---|
2201 | \everycr{\noalign{%
|
---|
2202 | %
|
---|
2203 | % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
|
---|
2204 | % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
|
---|
2205 | % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the problem
|
---|
2206 | % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
|
---|
2207 | \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
|
---|
2208 | %
|
---|
2209 | % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
|
---|
2210 | % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
|
---|
2211 | % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
|
---|
2212 | % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
|
---|
2213 | \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
|
---|
2214 | \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
|
---|
2215 | %
|
---|
2216 | % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
|
---|
2217 | % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
|
---|
2218 | % the first one.
|
---|
2219 | %
|
---|
2220 | % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
|
---|
2221 | % to the width of each template entry.
|
---|
2222 | %
|
---|
2223 | % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
|
---|
2224 | % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
|
---|
2225 | % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
|
---|
2226 | % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
|
---|
2227 | %
|
---|
2228 | % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
|
---|
2229 | \rightskip=0pt
|
---|
2230 | \ifnum\colcount=1
|
---|
2231 | % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
|
---|
2232 | \advance\hsize by\leftskip
|
---|
2233 | \else
|
---|
2234 | \ifsetpercent \else
|
---|
2235 | % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
|
---|
2236 | % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
|
---|
2237 | \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
|
---|
2238 | \fi
|
---|
2239 | % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
|
---|
2240 | \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
|
---|
2241 | \fi
|
---|
2242 | % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
|
---|
2243 | % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
|
---|
2244 | % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
|
---|
2245 | % For example:
|
---|
2246 | % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
|
---|
2247 | % @item @code{#}
|
---|
2248 | % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
|
---|
2249 | % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
|
---|
2250 | % characters.
|
---|
2251 | \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
|
---|
2252 | }
|
---|
2253 |
|
---|
2254 | \def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
|
---|
2255 | % If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
|
---|
2256 | % current baselineskip.
|
---|
2257 | \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
---|
2258 | %% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
|
---|
2259 | %% to keep lines equally spaced
|
---|
2260 | \let\multistrut = \strut
|
---|
2261 | %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
|
---|
2262 | %% table. If not, do nothing.
|
---|
2263 | %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
|
---|
2264 | \else
|
---|
2265 | \gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
|
---|
2266 | width0pt\relax} \fi
|
---|
2267 | \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
|
---|
2268 | \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
---|
2269 | \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
---|
2270 | %% than skip between lines in the table.
|
---|
2271 | \fi%
|
---|
2272 | \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
|
---|
2273 | \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
---|
2274 | \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
---|
2275 | %% than skip between lines in the table.
|
---|
2276 | \fi}
|
---|
2277 |
|
---|
2278 |
|
---|
2279 | \message{indexing,}
|
---|
2280 | % Index generation facilities
|
---|
2281 |
|
---|
2282 | % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
|
---|
2283 | % except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
|
---|
2284 | {\catcode`\@=11
|
---|
2285 | \gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
|
---|
2286 |
|
---|
2287 | % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
|
---|
2288 | % It automatically defines \fooindex such that
|
---|
2289 | % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
|
---|
2290 | % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
|
---|
2291 | % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
|
---|
2292 | % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
|
---|
2293 | % for the sake of vms.
|
---|
2294 | %
|
---|
2295 | \def\newindex#1{%
|
---|
2296 | \iflinks
|
---|
2297 | \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
---|
2298 | \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
|
---|
2299 | \fi
|
---|
2300 | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
|
---|
2301 | \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
|
---|
2302 | }
|
---|
2303 |
|
---|
2304 | % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
|
---|
2305 |
|
---|
2306 | \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
|
---|
2307 |
|
---|
2308 | % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
|
---|
2309 |
|
---|
2310 | \def\newcodeindex#1{%
|
---|
2311 | \iflinks
|
---|
2312 | \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
---|
2313 | \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
|
---|
2314 | \fi
|
---|
2315 | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
|
---|
2316 | \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}
|
---|
2317 | }
|
---|
2318 |
|
---|
2319 | \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
|
---|
2320 |
|
---|
2321 | % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
|
---|
2322 | % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
|
---|
2323 | % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
|
---|
2324 | % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
|
---|
2325 | \def\synindex#1 #2 {%
|
---|
2326 | \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
|
---|
2327 | \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
---|
2328 | \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
|
---|
2329 | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
|
---|
2330 | \noexpand\doindex{#2}}%
|
---|
2331 | }
|
---|
2332 |
|
---|
2333 | % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
|
---|
2334 | % inside @code.
|
---|
2335 | \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {%
|
---|
2336 | \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
|
---|
2337 | \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
---|
2338 | \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
|
---|
2339 | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
|
---|
2340 | \noexpand\docodeindex{#2}}%
|
---|
2341 | }
|
---|
2342 |
|
---|
2343 | % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
|
---|
2344 | % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
|
---|
2345 | % and it is "foo", the name of the index.
|
---|
2346 |
|
---|
2347 | % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
|
---|
2348 | % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
|
---|
2349 |
|
---|
2350 | % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
|
---|
2351 | % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
|
---|
2352 |
|
---|
2353 | \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
|
---|
2354 | \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
|
---|
2355 |
|
---|
2356 | % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
|
---|
2357 | \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
|
---|
2358 | \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
|
---|
2359 |
|
---|
2360 | \def\indexdummies{%
|
---|
2361 | \def\ { }%
|
---|
2362 | % Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
|
---|
2363 | \def\"{\realbackslash "}%
|
---|
2364 | \def\`{\realbackslash `}%
|
---|
2365 | \def\'{\realbackslash '}%
|
---|
2366 | \def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
|
---|
2367 | \def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
|
---|
2368 | \def\={\realbackslash =}%
|
---|
2369 | \def\b{\realbackslash b}%
|
---|
2370 | \def\c{\realbackslash c}%
|
---|
2371 | \def\d{\realbackslash d}%
|
---|
2372 | \def\u{\realbackslash u}%
|
---|
2373 | \def\v{\realbackslash v}%
|
---|
2374 | \def\H{\realbackslash H}%
|
---|
2375 | % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
|
---|
2376 | \def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
|
---|
2377 | \def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
|
---|
2378 | \def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
|
---|
2379 | \def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
|
---|
2380 | \def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
|
---|
2381 | \def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
|
---|
2382 | \def\o{\realbackslash o}%
|
---|
2383 | \def\O{\realbackslash O}%
|
---|
2384 | \def\l{\realbackslash l}%
|
---|
2385 | \def\L{\realbackslash L}%
|
---|
2386 | \def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
|
---|
2387 | % Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
|
---|
2388 | % (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
|
---|
2389 | % laboriously list every single command here.)
|
---|
2390 | \def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char.
|
---|
2391 | %\let\{ = \lbracecmd
|
---|
2392 | %\let\} = \rbracecmd
|
---|
2393 | \def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
|
---|
2394 | \def\w{\realbackslash w }%
|
---|
2395 | \def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
|
---|
2396 | %\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
|
---|
2397 | \def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
|
---|
2398 | \def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
|
---|
2399 | \def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
|
---|
2400 | \def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
|
---|
2401 | \def\less{\realbackslash less}%
|
---|
2402 | \def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
|
---|
2403 | \def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
|
---|
2404 | \def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
|
---|
2405 | \def\result{\realbackslash result}%
|
---|
2406 | \def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
|
---|
2407 | \def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
|
---|
2408 | \def\print{\realbackslash print}%
|
---|
2409 | \def\error{\realbackslash error}%
|
---|
2410 | \def\point{\realbackslash point}%
|
---|
2411 | \def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
|
---|
2412 | \def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
|
---|
2413 | \def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
|
---|
2414 | \def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
|
---|
2415 | \def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
|
---|
2416 | \def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
|
---|
2417 | \def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
|
---|
2418 | \def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
|
---|
2419 | \def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
|
---|
2420 | \def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
|
---|
2421 | \def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
|
---|
2422 | \def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
|
---|
2423 | \def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
|
---|
2424 | \def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
|
---|
2425 | \def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
|
---|
2426 | \def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
|
---|
2427 | \def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
|
---|
2428 | \def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
|
---|
2429 | %
|
---|
2430 | % Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
|
---|
2431 | % contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
|
---|
2432 | % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
|
---|
2433 | \let\value = \expandablevalue
|
---|
2434 | %
|
---|
2435 | \unsepspaces
|
---|
2436 | }
|
---|
2437 |
|
---|
2438 | % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
|
---|
2439 | % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
|
---|
2440 | % expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
|
---|
2441 | {\obeyspaces
|
---|
2442 | \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
|
---|
2443 |
|
---|
2444 | % \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
|
---|
2445 | % This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
|
---|
2446 | \def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
|
---|
2447 | \def\indexdummytex{TeX}
|
---|
2448 | \def\indexdummydots{...}
|
---|
2449 |
|
---|
2450 | \def\indexnofonts{%
|
---|
2451 | % Just ignore accents.
|
---|
2452 | \let\,=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2453 | \let\"=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2454 | \let\`=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2455 | \let\'=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2456 | \let\^=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2457 | \let\~=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2458 | \let\==\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2459 | \let\b=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2460 | \let\c=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2461 | \let\d=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2462 | \let\u=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2463 | \let\v=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2464 | \let\H=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2465 | \let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2466 | % Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
|
---|
2467 | \def\oe{oe}%
|
---|
2468 | \def\ae{ae}%
|
---|
2469 | \def\aa{aa}%
|
---|
2470 | \def\OE{OE}%
|
---|
2471 | \def\AE{AE}%
|
---|
2472 | \def\AA{AA}%
|
---|
2473 | \def\o{o}%
|
---|
2474 | \def\O{O}%
|
---|
2475 | \def\l{l}%
|
---|
2476 | \def\L{L}%
|
---|
2477 | \def\ss{ss}%
|
---|
2478 | \let\w=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2479 | \let\t=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2480 | \let\r=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2481 | \let\i=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2482 | \let\b=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2483 | \let\emph=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2484 | \let\strong=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2485 | \let\cite=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2486 | \let\sc=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2487 | %Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
|
---|
2488 | % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |...
|
---|
2489 | %\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2490 | \let\tclose=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2491 | \let\code=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2492 | \let\file=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2493 | \let\samp=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2494 | \let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2495 | \let\key=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2496 | \let\var=\indexdummyfont
|
---|
2497 | \let\TeX=\indexdummytex
|
---|
2498 | \let\dots=\indexdummydots
|
---|
2499 | \def\@{@}%
|
---|
2500 | }
|
---|
2501 |
|
---|
2502 | % To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
|
---|
2503 | % We must first make another character (@) an escape
|
---|
2504 | % so we do not become unable to do a definition.
|
---|
2505 |
|
---|
2506 | {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
|
---|
2507 | @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
|
---|
2508 |
|
---|
2509 | \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
|
---|
2510 | \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
|
---|
2511 |
|
---|
2512 | % For \ifx comparisons.
|
---|
2513 | \def\emptymacro{\empty}
|
---|
2514 |
|
---|
2515 | % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
|
---|
2516 | %
|
---|
2517 | \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
|
---|
2518 |
|
---|
2519 | % Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
|
---|
2520 | % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
|
---|
2521 | % \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are. The main exception
|
---|
2522 | % is with defuns, which call us directly.
|
---|
2523 | %
|
---|
2524 | \def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
|
---|
2525 | % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
|
---|
2526 | \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
|
---|
2527 | \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
|
---|
2528 | \fi
|
---|
2529 | {%
|
---|
2530 | \count255=\lastpenalty
|
---|
2531 | {%
|
---|
2532 | \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
|
---|
2533 | \escapechar=`\\
|
---|
2534 | {%
|
---|
2535 | \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
|
---|
2536 | \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
|
---|
2537 | % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
|
---|
2538 | %
|
---|
2539 | \def\thirdarg{#3}%
|
---|
2540 | %
|
---|
2541 | % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
|
---|
2542 | \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
|
---|
2543 | \let\subentry = \empty
|
---|
2544 | \else
|
---|
2545 | \def\subentry{ #3}%
|
---|
2546 | \fi
|
---|
2547 | %
|
---|
2548 | % First process the index-string with all font commands turned off
|
---|
2549 | % to get the string to sort by.
|
---|
2550 | {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
|
---|
2551 | %
|
---|
2552 | % Now produce the complete index entry, with both the sort key and the
|
---|
2553 | % original text, including any font commands.
|
---|
2554 | \toks0 = {#2}%
|
---|
2555 | \edef\temp{%
|
---|
2556 | \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
|
---|
2557 | \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
|
---|
2558 | }%
|
---|
2559 | %
|
---|
2560 | % If third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index string.
|
---|
2561 | \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
|
---|
2562 | \toks0 = {#3}%
|
---|
2563 | \edef\temp{\temp{\the\toks0}}%
|
---|
2564 | \fi
|
---|
2565 | %
|
---|
2566 | % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
|
---|
2567 | % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
|
---|
2568 | % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
|
---|
2569 | % \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences
|
---|
2570 | % like this:
|
---|
2571 | % @end defun
|
---|
2572 | % @tindex whatever
|
---|
2573 | % @defun ...
|
---|
2574 | % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
|
---|
2575 | % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
|
---|
2576 | % the previous defun.
|
---|
2577 | %
|
---|
2578 | % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
|
---|
2579 | % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
|
---|
2580 | %
|
---|
2581 | % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
|
---|
2582 | %
|
---|
2583 | \iflinks
|
---|
2584 | \ifvmode
|
---|
2585 | \skip0 = \lastskip
|
---|
2586 | \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
|
---|
2587 | \fi
|
---|
2588 | %
|
---|
2589 | \temp % do the write
|
---|
2590 | %
|
---|
2591 | %
|
---|
2592 | \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
|
---|
2593 | \fi
|
---|
2594 | }%
|
---|
2595 | }%
|
---|
2596 | \penalty\count255
|
---|
2597 | }%
|
---|
2598 | }
|
---|
2599 |
|
---|
2600 | % The index entry written in the file actually looks like
|
---|
2601 | % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
|
---|
2602 | % or
|
---|
2603 | % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
|
---|
2604 | % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
|
---|
2605 | % containing these kinds of lines:
|
---|
2606 | % \initial {c}
|
---|
2607 | % before the first topic whose initial is c
|
---|
2608 | % \entry {topic}{pagelist}
|
---|
2609 | % for a topic that is used without subtopics
|
---|
2610 | % \primary {topic}
|
---|
2611 | % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
|
---|
2612 | % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
|
---|
2613 | % for each subtopic.
|
---|
2614 |
|
---|
2615 | % Define the user-accessible indexing commands
|
---|
2616 | % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
|
---|
2617 |
|
---|
2618 | \def\findex {\fnindex}
|
---|
2619 | \def\kindex {\kyindex}
|
---|
2620 | \def\cindex {\cpindex}
|
---|
2621 | \def\vindex {\vrindex}
|
---|
2622 | \def\tindex {\tpindex}
|
---|
2623 | \def\pindex {\pgindex}
|
---|
2624 |
|
---|
2625 | \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
|
---|
2626 | {\obeylines %
|
---|
2627 | \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
|
---|
2628 | \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
|
---|
2629 |
|
---|
2630 | % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
|
---|
2631 |
|
---|
2632 | % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
|
---|
2633 | % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
|
---|
2634 | %
|
---|
2635 | \def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
|
---|
2636 | \def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
|
---|
2637 | \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
|
---|
2638 | %
|
---|
2639 | \indexfonts \rm
|
---|
2640 | \tolerance = 9500
|
---|
2641 | \indexbreaks
|
---|
2642 | %
|
---|
2643 | % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
|
---|
2644 | % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
|
---|
2645 | % \initial {@}
|
---|
2646 | % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
|
---|
2647 | % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
|
---|
2648 | \catcode`\@ = 11
|
---|
2649 | \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
|
---|
2650 | \ifeof 1
|
---|
2651 | % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
|
---|
2652 | % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
|
---|
2653 | % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
|
---|
2654 | % there is some text.
|
---|
2655 | (Index is nonexistent)
|
---|
2656 | \else
|
---|
2657 | %
|
---|
2658 | % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
|
---|
2659 | % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
|
---|
2660 | % it can discover if there is anything in it.
|
---|
2661 | \read 1 to \temp
|
---|
2662 | \ifeof 1
|
---|
2663 | (Index is empty)
|
---|
2664 | \else
|
---|
2665 | % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
|
---|
2666 | % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
|
---|
2667 | % to make right now.
|
---|
2668 | \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
|
---|
2669 | \catcode`\\ = 0
|
---|
2670 | \escapechar = `\\
|
---|
2671 | \begindoublecolumns
|
---|
2672 | \input \jobname.#1s
|
---|
2673 | \enddoublecolumns
|
---|
2674 | \fi
|
---|
2675 | \fi
|
---|
2676 | \closein 1
|
---|
2677 | \endgroup}
|
---|
2678 |
|
---|
2679 | % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
|
---|
2680 | % Change them to control the appearance of the index.
|
---|
2681 |
|
---|
2682 | \def\initial#1{{%
|
---|
2683 | % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
|
---|
2684 | \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
|
---|
2685 | %
|
---|
2686 | % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
|
---|
2687 | \removelastskip
|
---|
2688 | %
|
---|
2689 | % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
|
---|
2690 | \penalty -300
|
---|
2691 | %
|
---|
2692 | % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
|
---|
2693 | % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
|
---|
2694 | % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
|
---|
2695 | % we need before each entry, but it's better.
|
---|
2696 | %
|
---|
2697 | % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
|
---|
2698 | \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
|
---|
2699 | \leftline{\secbf #1}%
|
---|
2700 | \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
|
---|
2701 | %
|
---|
2702 | % Do our best not to break after the initial.
|
---|
2703 | \nobreak
|
---|
2704 | }}
|
---|
2705 |
|
---|
2706 | % This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
|
---|
2707 | % flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents
|
---|
2708 | % entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
|
---|
2709 | %
|
---|
2710 | \def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
|
---|
2711 | %
|
---|
2712 | % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
|
---|
2713 | % affect previous text.
|
---|
2714 | \par
|
---|
2715 | %
|
---|
2716 | % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
|
---|
2717 | \parfillskip = 0in
|
---|
2718 | %
|
---|
2719 | % No extra space above this paragraph.
|
---|
2720 | \parskip = 0in
|
---|
2721 | %
|
---|
2722 | % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
|
---|
2723 | \finalhyphendemerits = 0
|
---|
2724 | %
|
---|
2725 | % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
|
---|
2726 | % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
|
---|
2727 | % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
|
---|
2728 | % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
|
---|
2729 | % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
|
---|
2730 | %
|
---|
2731 | % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
|
---|
2732 | % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
|
---|
2733 | \hangindent = 2em
|
---|
2734 | %
|
---|
2735 | % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
|
---|
2736 | % with blank space.
|
---|
2737 | \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
|
---|
2738 | %
|
---|
2739 | % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
|
---|
2740 | \vskip 0pt plus1pt
|
---|
2741 | %
|
---|
2742 | % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
|
---|
2743 | % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
|
---|
2744 | \noindent
|
---|
2745 | %
|
---|
2746 | % Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it.
|
---|
2747 | #1%
|
---|
2748 | % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
|
---|
2749 | % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
|
---|
2750 | % cursed by a Unix daemon.
|
---|
2751 | \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
|
---|
2752 | \def\tempb{#2}%
|
---|
2753 | \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
|
---|
2754 | \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
|
---|
2755 | \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
|
---|
2756 | %
|
---|
2757 | % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
|
---|
2758 | % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
|
---|
2759 | % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
|
---|
2760 | \hfil\penalty50
|
---|
2761 | \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
|
---|
2762 | %
|
---|
2763 | % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
|
---|
2764 | % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
|
---|
2765 | % \hbox ensues.
|
---|
2766 | \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
|
---|
2767 | \fi%
|
---|
2768 | \par
|
---|
2769 | \endgroup}
|
---|
2770 |
|
---|
2771 | % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
|
---|
2772 | \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
|
---|
2773 | \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
|
---|
2774 |
|
---|
2775 | \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
|
---|
2776 |
|
---|
2777 | \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
|
---|
2778 |
|
---|
2779 | \def\secondary #1#2{
|
---|
2780 | {\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in
|
---|
2781 | \hangindent =1in \hangafter=1
|
---|
2782 | \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par
|
---|
2783 | }}
|
---|
2784 |
|
---|
2785 | % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
|
---|
2786 | % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
|
---|
2787 | % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
|
---|
2788 | \catcode`\@=11
|
---|
2789 |
|
---|
2790 | \newbox\partialpage
|
---|
2791 | \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
|
---|
2792 |
|
---|
2793 | \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
|
---|
2794 | % Grab any single-column material above us.
|
---|
2795 | \output = {\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
|
---|
2796 | %
|
---|
2797 | % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
|
---|
2798 | % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
|
---|
2799 | % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
|
---|
2800 | % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
|
---|
2801 | % that case, we must prevent the second \partialpage from
|
---|
2802 | % simply overwriting the first, causing us to lose the page.
|
---|
2803 | % This will preserve it until a real output routine can ship it
|
---|
2804 | % out. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this runs and
|
---|
2805 | % this will be a no-op.
|
---|
2806 | \unvbox\partialpage
|
---|
2807 | %
|
---|
2808 | % Unvbox the main output page.
|
---|
2809 | \unvbox255
|
---|
2810 | \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
|
---|
2811 | }}%
|
---|
2812 | \eject
|
---|
2813 | %
|
---|
2814 | % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
|
---|
2815 | \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
|
---|
2816 | %
|
---|
2817 | % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
|
---|
2818 | % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
|
---|
2819 | % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
|
---|
2820 | % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
|
---|
2821 | % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
|
---|
2822 | %
|
---|
2823 | % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
|
---|
2824 | % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
|
---|
2825 | % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
|
---|
2826 | % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
|
---|
2827 | % as it did when we hard-coded it.
|
---|
2828 | %
|
---|
2829 | % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
|
---|
2830 | % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
|
---|
2831 | % been clobbered.
|
---|
2832 | %
|
---|
2833 | \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
|
---|
2834 | \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
|
---|
2835 | \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
|
---|
2836 | \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
---|
2837 | %
|
---|
2838 | % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
|
---|
2839 | % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
|
---|
2840 | \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage
|
---|
2841 | \vsize = 2\vsize
|
---|
2842 | }
|
---|
2843 |
|
---|
2844 | % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
|
---|
2845 | % the last.
|
---|
2846 | %
|
---|
2847 | \def\doublecolumnout{%
|
---|
2848 | \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
|
---|
2849 | % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
|
---|
2850 | % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
|
---|
2851 | % previous page.
|
---|
2852 | \dimen@ = \vsize
|
---|
2853 | \divide\dimen@ by 2
|
---|
2854 | %
|
---|
2855 | % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
|
---|
2856 | \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
|
---|
2857 | \onepageout\pagesofar
|
---|
2858 | \unvbox255
|
---|
2859 | \penalty\outputpenalty
|
---|
2860 | }
|
---|
2861 | \def\pagesofar{%
|
---|
2862 | % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
|
---|
2863 | % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
|
---|
2864 | \advance\vsize by \ht\partialpage
|
---|
2865 | \unvbox\partialpage
|
---|
2866 | %
|
---|
2867 | \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
---|
2868 | \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
|
---|
2869 | \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
|
---|
2870 | }
|
---|
2871 | \def\enddoublecolumns{%
|
---|
2872 | \output = {%
|
---|
2873 | % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave on the
|
---|
2874 | % current page, no automatic page break.
|
---|
2875 | \balancecolumns
|
---|
2876 | %
|
---|
2877 | % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
|
---|
2878 | % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
|
---|
2879 | % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
|
---|
2880 | % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
|
---|
2881 | % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
|
---|
2882 | % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
|
---|
2883 | % the output somewhat more palatable.)
|
---|
2884 | \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
|
---|
2885 | %
|
---|
2886 | % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
|
---|
2887 | % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
|
---|
2888 | % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize.
|
---|
2889 | \pagegoal = \vsize
|
---|
2890 | }%
|
---|
2891 | \eject
|
---|
2892 | \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
|
---|
2893 | }
|
---|
2894 | \def\balancecolumns{%
|
---|
2895 | % Called at the end of the double column material.
|
---|
2896 | \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
|
---|
2897 | \dimen@ = \ht0
|
---|
2898 | \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
|
---|
2899 | \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
|
---|
2900 | \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
|
---|
2901 | %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
|
---|
2902 | \splittopskip = \topskip
|
---|
2903 | % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
|
---|
2904 | {%
|
---|
2905 | \vbadness = 10000
|
---|
2906 | \loop
|
---|
2907 | \global\setbox3 = \copy0
|
---|
2908 | \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
|
---|
2909 | \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
|
---|
2910 | \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
|
---|
2911 | \repeat
|
---|
2912 | }%
|
---|
2913 | %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
|
---|
2914 | \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
|
---|
2915 | \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
|
---|
2916 | %
|
---|
2917 | \pagesofar
|
---|
2918 | }
|
---|
2919 | \catcode`\@ = \other
|
---|
2920 |
|
---|
2921 |
|
---|
2922 | \message{sectioning,}
|
---|
2923 | % Define chapters, sections, etc.
|
---|
2924 |
|
---|
2925 | \newcount\chapno
|
---|
2926 | \newcount\secno \secno=0
|
---|
2927 | \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
|
---|
2928 | \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
|
---|
2929 |
|
---|
2930 | % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
|
---|
2931 | \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
|
---|
2932 | \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
|
---|
2933 |
|
---|
2934 | % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
|
---|
2935 | % page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise.
|
---|
2936 | \def\thischapter{}
|
---|
2937 | \def\thissection{}
|
---|
2938 |
|
---|
2939 | \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
|
---|
2940 | \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
|
---|
2941 |
|
---|
2942 | % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
|
---|
2943 | \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
|
---|
2944 | \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
|
---|
2945 |
|
---|
2946 | % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
|
---|
2947 | \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
|
---|
2948 | \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
|
---|
2949 |
|
---|
2950 | % Choose a numbered-heading macro
|
---|
2951 | % #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
|
---|
2952 | % #2 is text for heading
|
---|
2953 | \def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
|
---|
2954 | \ifcase\absseclevel
|
---|
2955 | \chapterzzz{#2}
|
---|
2956 | \or
|
---|
2957 | \seczzz{#2}
|
---|
2958 | \or
|
---|
2959 | \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
|
---|
2960 | \or
|
---|
2961 | \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
---|
2962 | \else
|
---|
2963 | \ifnum \absseclevel<0
|
---|
2964 | \chapterzzz{#2}
|
---|
2965 | \else
|
---|
2966 | \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
---|
2967 | \fi
|
---|
2968 | \fi
|
---|
2969 | }
|
---|
2970 |
|
---|
2971 | % like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
|
---|
2972 | \def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
|
---|
2973 | \ifcase\absseclevel
|
---|
2974 | \appendixzzz{#2}
|
---|
2975 | \or
|
---|
2976 | \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
|
---|
2977 | \or
|
---|
2978 | \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
|
---|
2979 | \or
|
---|
2980 | \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
---|
2981 | \else
|
---|
2982 | \ifnum \absseclevel<0
|
---|
2983 | \appendixzzz{#2}
|
---|
2984 | \else
|
---|
2985 | \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
---|
2986 | \fi
|
---|
2987 | \fi
|
---|
2988 | }
|
---|
2989 |
|
---|
2990 | % like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
|
---|
2991 | \def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
|
---|
2992 | \ifcase\absseclevel
|
---|
2993 | \unnumberedzzz{#2}
|
---|
2994 | \or
|
---|
2995 | \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
|
---|
2996 | \or
|
---|
2997 | \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
|
---|
2998 | \or
|
---|
2999 | \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
---|
3000 | \else
|
---|
3001 | \ifnum \absseclevel<0
|
---|
3002 | \unnumberedzzz{#2}
|
---|
3003 | \else
|
---|
3004 | \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
---|
3005 | \fi
|
---|
3006 | \fi
|
---|
3007 | }
|
---|
3008 |
|
---|
3009 | % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
|
---|
3010 | \def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
|
---|
3011 | \outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
|
---|
3012 | \def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
|
---|
3013 | \def\chapterzzz #1{%
|
---|
3014 | \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
|
---|
3015 | \global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
|
---|
3016 | \chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
|
---|
3017 | \gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
---|
3018 | \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
|
---|
3019 | % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
|
---|
3020 | % because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
|
---|
3021 | \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
---|
3022 | \toks0 = {#1}%
|
---|
3023 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
|
---|
3024 | {\the\chapno}}}%
|
---|
3025 | \temp
|
---|
3026 | \donoderef
|
---|
3027 | \global\let\section = \numberedsec
|
---|
3028 | \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
---|
3029 | \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
---|
3030 | }
|
---|
3031 |
|
---|
3032 | \outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
|
---|
3033 | \def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
|
---|
3034 | \def\appendixzzz #1{%
|
---|
3035 | \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
|
---|
3036 | \global\advance \appendixno by 1
|
---|
3037 | \message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
|
---|
3038 | \chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
|
---|
3039 | \gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
---|
3040 | \gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
|
---|
3041 | \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
---|
3042 | \toks0 = {#1}%
|
---|
3043 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
|
---|
3044 | {\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}}%
|
---|
3045 | \temp
|
---|
3046 | \appendixnoderef
|
---|
3047 | \global\let\section = \appendixsec
|
---|
3048 | \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
|
---|
3049 | \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
|
---|
3050 | }
|
---|
3051 |
|
---|
3052 | % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
|
---|
3053 | \outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
|
---|
3054 | \def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
|
---|
3055 |
|
---|
3056 | % @top is like @unnumbered.
|
---|
3057 | \outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
|
---|
3058 |
|
---|
3059 | \outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
|
---|
3060 | \def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
|
---|
3061 | \def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
|
---|
3062 | \secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
|
---|
3063 | %
|
---|
3064 | % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
|
---|
3065 | % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
|
---|
3066 | % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
|
---|
3067 | % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
|
---|
3068 | % to be executed, not expanded).
|
---|
3069 | %
|
---|
3070 | % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
|
---|
3071 | % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
|
---|
3072 | % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
|
---|
3073 | % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
|
---|
3074 | % the toc entries.)
|
---|
3075 | \toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
|
---|
3076 | %
|
---|
3077 | \unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
|
---|
3078 | \gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
---|
3079 | \toks0 = {#1}%
|
---|
3080 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
|
---|
3081 | \temp
|
---|
3082 | \unnumbnoderef
|
---|
3083 | \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
|
---|
3084 | \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
|
---|
3085 | \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
|
---|
3086 | }
|
---|
3087 |
|
---|
3088 | % Sections.
|
---|
3089 | \outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
|
---|
3090 | \def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
|
---|
3091 | \def\seczzz #1{%
|
---|
3092 | \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
|
---|
3093 | \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
|
---|
3094 | \toks0 = {#1}%
|
---|
3095 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
|
---|
3096 | {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
|
---|
3097 | \temp
|
---|
3098 | \donoderef
|
---|
3099 | \nobreak
|
---|
3100 | }
|
---|
3101 |
|
---|
3102 | \outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
|
---|
3103 | \outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
|
---|
3104 | \def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
|
---|
3105 | \def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
|
---|
3106 | \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
|
---|
3107 | \gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
|
---|
3108 | \toks0 = {#1}%
|
---|
3109 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
|
---|
3110 | {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
|
---|
3111 | \temp
|
---|
3112 | \appendixnoderef
|
---|
3113 | \nobreak
|
---|
3114 | }
|
---|
3115 |
|
---|
3116 | \outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
|
---|
3117 | \def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
|
---|
3118 | \def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
|
---|
3119 | \plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
---|
3120 | \toks0 = {#1}%
|
---|
3121 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}}}%
|
---|
3122 | \temp
|
---|
3123 | \unnumbnoderef
|
---|
3124 | \nobreak
|
---|
3125 | }
|
---|
3126 |
|
---|
3127 | % Subsections.
|
---|
3128 | \outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
|
---|
3129 | \def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
|
---|
3130 | \def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
|
---|
3131 | \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
|
---|
3132 | \subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
|
---|
3133 | \toks0 = {#1}%
|
---|
3134 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
|
---|
3135 | {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
|
---|
3136 | \temp
|
---|
3137 | \donoderef
|
---|
3138 | \nobreak
|
---|
3139 | }
|
---|
3140 |
|
---|
3141 | \outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
|
---|
3142 | \def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
|
---|
3143 | \def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
|
---|
3144 | \gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
|
---|
3145 | \subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
|
---|
3146 | \toks0 = {#1}%
|
---|
3147 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
|
---|
3148 | {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
|
---|
3149 | \temp
|
---|
3150 | \appendixnoderef
|
---|
3151 | \nobreak
|
---|
3152 | }
|
---|
3153 |
|
---|
3154 | \outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
|
---|
3155 | \def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
|
---|
3156 | \def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
|
---|
3157 | \plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
---|
3158 | \toks0 = {#1}%
|
---|
3159 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
|
---|
3160 | {\the\toks0}}}%
|
---|
3161 | \temp
|
---|
3162 | \unnumbnoderef
|
---|
3163 | \nobreak
|
---|
3164 | }
|
---|
3165 |
|
---|
3166 | % Subsubsections.
|
---|
3167 | \outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
|
---|
3168 | \def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
|
---|
3169 | \def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
|
---|
3170 | \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
|
---|
3171 | \subsubsecheading {#1}
|
---|
3172 | {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
|
---|
3173 | \toks0 = {#1}%
|
---|
3174 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
|
---|
3175 | {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
|
---|
3176 | \temp
|
---|
3177 | \donoderef
|
---|
3178 | \nobreak
|
---|
3179 | }
|
---|
3180 |
|
---|
3181 | \outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
|
---|
3182 | \def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
|
---|
3183 | \def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
|
---|
3184 | \gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
|
---|
3185 | \subsubsecheading {#1}
|
---|
3186 | {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
|
---|
3187 | \toks0 = {#1}%
|
---|
3188 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
|
---|
3189 | {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
|
---|
3190 | \temp
|
---|
3191 | \appendixnoderef
|
---|
3192 | \nobreak
|
---|
3193 | }
|
---|
3194 |
|
---|
3195 | \outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
|
---|
3196 | \def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
|
---|
3197 | \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
|
---|
3198 | \plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
---|
3199 | \toks0 = {#1}%
|
---|
3200 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
|
---|
3201 | {\the\toks0}}}%
|
---|
3202 | \temp
|
---|
3203 | \unnumbnoderef
|
---|
3204 | \nobreak
|
---|
3205 | }
|
---|
3206 |
|
---|
3207 | % These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
|
---|
3208 | % Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
|
---|
3209 | \def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
|
---|
3210 | \def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
|
---|
3211 | \def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
|
---|
3212 | \def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
|
---|
3213 | \def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
|
---|
3214 |
|
---|
3215 | \def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
|
---|
3216 | \def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
|
---|
3217 | \def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
|
---|
3218 | \def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
|
---|
3219 |
|
---|
3220 | \def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
|
---|
3221 | \def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
|
---|
3222 | \def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
|
---|
3223 | \def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
|
---|
3224 |
|
---|
3225 | % These macros control what the section commands do, according
|
---|
3226 | % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
|
---|
3227 | % Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
|
---|
3228 | \global\let\section = \numberedsec
|
---|
3229 | \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
---|
3230 | \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
---|
3231 |
|
---|
3232 | % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
|
---|
3233 |
|
---|
3234 | % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
|
---|
3235 | % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
|
---|
3236 | % overlong headings to fold.
|
---|
3237 | % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
|
---|
3238 | % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
|
---|
3239 | % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
|
---|
3240 | % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
|
---|
3241 |
|
---|
3242 |
|
---|
3243 | \def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
|
---|
3244 | \def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
|
---|
3245 | {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
|
---|
3246 | {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
---|
3247 | \parindent=0pt\raggedright
|
---|
3248 | \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
|
---|
3249 |
|
---|
3250 | \def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
|
---|
3251 | \def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
|
---|
3252 | {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
---|
3253 | \parindent=0pt\raggedright
|
---|
3254 | \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
|
---|
3255 |
|
---|
3256 | % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
|
---|
3257 | \def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
|
---|
3258 | \def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
|
---|
3259 | \def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
|
---|
3260 |
|
---|
3261 | % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
|
---|
3262 | % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
|
---|
3263 | % given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
|
---|
3264 |
|
---|
3265 | %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
|
---|
3266 | \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
|
---|
3267 |
|
---|
3268 | \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
|
---|
3269 |
|
---|
3270 | %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
|
---|
3271 | % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
|
---|
3272 |
|
---|
3273 | \newskip\chapheadingskip
|
---|
3274 |
|
---|
3275 | \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
|
---|
3276 | \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
---|
3277 | \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
|
---|
3278 |
|
---|
3279 | \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
|
---|
3280 |
|
---|
3281 | \def\CHAPPAGoff{%
|
---|
3282 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
---|
3283 | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
|
---|
3284 | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
|
---|
3285 |
|
---|
3286 | \def\CHAPPAGon{%
|
---|
3287 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
---|
3288 | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
|
---|
3289 | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
|
---|
3290 | \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
|
---|
3291 |
|
---|
3292 | \def\CHAPPAGodd{
|
---|
3293 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
---|
3294 | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
|
---|
3295 | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
|
---|
3296 | \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
|
---|
3297 |
|
---|
3298 | \CHAPPAGon
|
---|
3299 |
|
---|
3300 | \def\CHAPFplain{
|
---|
3301 | \global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
|
---|
3302 | \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
|
---|
3303 | \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
|
---|
3304 |
|
---|
3305 | % Plain chapter opening.
|
---|
3306 | % #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
|
---|
3307 | \def\chfplain#1#2{%
|
---|
3308 | \pchapsepmacro
|
---|
3309 | {%
|
---|
3310 | \chapfonts \rm
|
---|
3311 | \def\chapnum{#2}%
|
---|
3312 | \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
|
---|
3313 | \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
|
---|
3314 | \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
|
---|
3315 | \unhbox0 #1\par}%
|
---|
3316 | }%
|
---|
3317 | \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
|
---|
3318 | \nobreak
|
---|
3319 | }
|
---|
3320 |
|
---|
3321 | % Plain opening for unnumbered.
|
---|
3322 | \def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
|
---|
3323 |
|
---|
3324 | % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
|
---|
3325 | \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
|
---|
3326 | \def\centerchfplain#1{{%
|
---|
3327 | \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
|
---|
3328 | \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
|
---|
3329 | \leftskip = \rightskip
|
---|
3330 | \parfillskip = 0pt
|
---|
3331 | }%
|
---|
3332 | \chfplain{#1}{}%
|
---|
3333 | }}
|
---|
3334 |
|
---|
3335 | \CHAPFplain % The default
|
---|
3336 |
|
---|
3337 | \def\unnchfopen #1{%
|
---|
3338 | \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
---|
3339 | \parindent=0pt\raggedright
|
---|
3340 | \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
|
---|
3341 | }
|
---|
3342 |
|
---|
3343 | \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
|
---|
3344 | \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
|
---|
3345 | \par\penalty 5000 %
|
---|
3346 | }
|
---|
3347 |
|
---|
3348 | \def\centerchfopen #1{%
|
---|
3349 | \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
---|
3350 | \parindent=0pt
|
---|
3351 | \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
|
---|
3352 | }
|
---|
3353 |
|
---|
3354 | \def\CHAPFopen{
|
---|
3355 | \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
|
---|
3356 | \global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
|
---|
3357 | \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
|
---|
3358 |
|
---|
3359 |
|
---|
3360 | % Section titles.
|
---|
3361 | \newskip\secheadingskip
|
---|
3362 | \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
|
---|
3363 | \def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
|
---|
3364 | \def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
|
---|
3365 |
|
---|
3366 | % Subsection titles.
|
---|
3367 | \newskip \subsecheadingskip
|
---|
3368 | \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
|
---|
3369 | \def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
|
---|
3370 | \def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
|
---|
3371 |
|
---|
3372 | % Subsubsection titles.
|
---|
3373 | \let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
|
---|
3374 | \let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
|
---|
3375 | \def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
|
---|
3376 | \def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
|
---|
3377 |
|
---|
3378 |
|
---|
3379 | % Print any size section title.
|
---|
3380 | %
|
---|
3381 | % #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
|
---|
3382 | % number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
|
---|
3383 | \def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
|
---|
3384 | {%
|
---|
3385 | \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
|
---|
3386 | \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
|
---|
3387 | }%
|
---|
3388 | {%
|
---|
3389 | % Switch to the right set of fonts.
|
---|
3390 | \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
|
---|
3391 | %
|
---|
3392 | % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
|
---|
3393 | \def\secnum{#2}%
|
---|
3394 | \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
|
---|
3395 | %
|
---|
3396 | \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
|
---|
3397 | \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
|
---|
3398 | \unhbox0 #3}%
|
---|
3399 | }%
|
---|
3400 | \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
|
---|
3401 | }
|
---|
3402 |
|
---|
3403 |
|
---|
3404 | \message{toc,}
|
---|
3405 | \newwrite\tocfile
|
---|
3406 |
|
---|
3407 | % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
|
---|
3408 | % Called from @chapter, etc. We supply {\folio} at the end of the
|
---|
3409 | % argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
|
---|
3410 | %
|
---|
3411 | % We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
|
---|
3412 | % given time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
|
---|
3413 | %
|
---|
3414 | \newif\iftocfileopened
|
---|
3415 | \def\writetocentry#1{%
|
---|
3416 | \iftocfileopened\else
|
---|
3417 | \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
|
---|
3418 | \global\tocfileopenedtrue
|
---|
3419 | \fi
|
---|
3420 | \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
|
---|
3421 | }
|
---|
3422 |
|
---|
3423 | \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
|
---|
3424 | \newcount\savepageno
|
---|
3425 | \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
|
---|
3426 |
|
---|
3427 | % Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
|
---|
3428 | % to \tocfile.
|
---|
3429 | %
|
---|
3430 | \def\startcontents#1{%
|
---|
3431 | % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
|
---|
3432 | % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
|
---|
3433 | % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
|
---|
3434 | % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
|
---|
3435 | \contentsalignmacro
|
---|
3436 | \immediate\closeout\tocfile
|
---|
3437 | %
|
---|
3438 | % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
|
---|
3439 | % It is abundantly clear what they are.
|
---|
3440 | \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
|
---|
3441 | \savepageno = \pageno
|
---|
3442 | \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
|
---|
3443 | \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11
|
---|
3444 | % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
|
---|
3445 | % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97.
|
---|
3446 | %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
|
---|
3447 | \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
|
---|
3448 | \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
|
---|
3449 | %
|
---|
3450 | % Roman numerals for page numbers.
|
---|
3451 | \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
|
---|
3452 | }
|
---|
3453 |
|
---|
3454 |
|
---|
3455 | % Normal (long) toc.
|
---|
3456 | \def\contents{%
|
---|
3457 | \startcontents{\putwordTableofContents}%
|
---|
3458 | \openin 1 \jobname.toc
|
---|
3459 | \ifeof 1 \else
|
---|
3460 | \closein 1
|
---|
3461 | \input \jobname.toc
|
---|
3462 | \fi
|
---|
3463 | \vfill \eject
|
---|
3464 | \endgroup
|
---|
3465 | \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
|
---|
3466 | \pageno = \savepageno
|
---|
3467 | }
|
---|
3468 |
|
---|
3469 | % And just the chapters.
|
---|
3470 | \def\summarycontents{%
|
---|
3471 | \startcontents{\putwordShortContents}%
|
---|
3472 | %
|
---|
3473 | \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
|
---|
3474 | \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
|
---|
3475 | % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
|
---|
3476 | \secfonts
|
---|
3477 | \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
|
---|
3478 | \rm
|
---|
3479 | \hyphenpenalty = 10000
|
---|
3480 | \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
|
---|
3481 | \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
|
---|
3482 | \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
|
---|
3483 | \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
|
---|
3484 | \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
|
---|
3485 | \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
|
---|
3486 | \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
|
---|
3487 | \openin 1 \jobname.toc
|
---|
3488 | \ifeof 1 \else
|
---|
3489 | \closein 1
|
---|
3490 | \input \jobname.toc
|
---|
3491 | \fi
|
---|
3492 | \vfill \eject
|
---|
3493 | \endgroup
|
---|
3494 | \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
|
---|
3495 | \pageno = \savepageno
|
---|
3496 | }
|
---|
3497 | \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
|
---|
3498 |
|
---|
3499 | % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
|
---|
3500 | % The first argument is the chapter or section name.
|
---|
3501 | % The last argument is the page number.
|
---|
3502 | % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
|
---|
3503 |
|
---|
3504 | % Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents.
|
---|
3505 | \def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
|
---|
3506 |
|
---|
3507 | % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings
|
---|
3508 | \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
|
---|
3509 | \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno{#3}}%
|
---|
3510 | }
|
---|
3511 |
|
---|
3512 | % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
|
---|
3513 | % The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
|
---|
3514 | % We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
|
---|
3515 | % command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
|
---|
3516 | % for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
|
---|
3517 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix }
|
---|
3518 | \newdimen\shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth = \wd0
|
---|
3519 |
|
---|
3520 | \def\shortchaplabel#1{%
|
---|
3521 | % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of
|
---|
3522 | % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned.
|
---|
3523 | \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}%
|
---|
3524 | \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi
|
---|
3525 | %
|
---|
3526 | % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the
|
---|
3527 | % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
|
---|
3528 | % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
|
---|
3529 | % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
|
---|
3530 | \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em
|
---|
3531 | \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}%
|
---|
3532 | }
|
---|
3533 |
|
---|
3534 | \def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
|
---|
3535 | \def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno{#2}}}
|
---|
3536 |
|
---|
3537 | % Sections.
|
---|
3538 | \def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
---|
3539 | \def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}}
|
---|
3540 |
|
---|
3541 | % Subsections.
|
---|
3542 | \def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
|
---|
3543 | \def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
|
---|
3544 |
|
---|
3545 | % And subsubsections.
|
---|
3546 | \def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
|
---|
3547 | \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
|
---|
3548 | \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
|
---|
3549 |
|
---|
3550 | % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
|
---|
3551 | \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
|
---|
3552 |
|
---|
3553 | % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
|
---|
3554 | % page number.
|
---|
3555 | %
|
---|
3556 | % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
|
---|
3557 | % if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
|
---|
3558 | \def\dochapentry#1#2{%
|
---|
3559 | \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
|
---|
3560 | \begingroup
|
---|
3561 | \chapentryfonts
|
---|
3562 | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
|
---|
3563 | \endgroup
|
---|
3564 | \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
|
---|
3565 | }
|
---|
3566 |
|
---|
3567 | \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
---|
3568 | \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
|
---|
3569 | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
|
---|
3570 | \endgroup}
|
---|
3571 |
|
---|
3572 | \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
---|
3573 | \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
|
---|
3574 | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
|
---|
3575 | \endgroup}
|
---|
3576 |
|
---|
3577 | \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
---|
3578 | \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
|
---|
3579 | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
|
---|
3580 | \endgroup}
|
---|
3581 |
|
---|
3582 | % Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
|
---|
3583 | % the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We
|
---|
3584 | % can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
|
---|
3585 | % of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
|
---|
3586 | \def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
---|
3587 | \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
|
---|
3588 | % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments. Since the toc is
|
---|
3589 | % typeset in cmr, so characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
|
---|
3590 | % have to do the usual translation tricks.
|
---|
3591 | \entry{#1}{#2}%
|
---|
3592 | \endgroup}
|
---|
3593 |
|
---|
3594 | % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
|
---|
3595 | \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
|
---|
3596 |
|
---|
3597 | \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
---|
3598 | \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
---|
3599 |
|
---|
3600 | \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
|
---|
3601 | \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
---|
3602 | \let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
|
---|
3603 | \let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
|
---|
3604 |
|
---|
3605 |
|
---|
3606 | \message{environments,}
|
---|
3607 |
|
---|
3608 | % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
|
---|
3609 | % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
|
---|
3610 | % Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts.
|
---|
3611 | \newbox\dblarrowbox \newbox\longdblarrowbox
|
---|
3612 | \newbox\pushcharbox \newbox\bullbox
|
---|
3613 | \newbox\equivbox \newbox\errorbox
|
---|
3614 |
|
---|
3615 | %{\tentt
|
---|
3616 | %\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}
|
---|
3617 | %\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}
|
---|
3618 | %\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}
|
---|
3619 | %\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}
|
---|
3620 | % Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook)
|
---|
3621 | %\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex
|
---|
3622 | % depth .1ex\hfil}
|
---|
3623 | %}
|
---|
3624 |
|
---|
3625 | % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
|
---|
3626 | \def\point{$\star$}
|
---|
3627 | \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
|
---|
3628 | \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
|
---|
3629 | \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
|
---|
3630 | \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
|
---|
3631 |
|
---|
3632 | % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
|
---|
3633 | {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
|
---|
3634 | \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
|
---|
3635 | % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
|
---|
3636 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
|
---|
3637 |
|
---|
3638 | \global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
|
---|
3639 | \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
|
---|
3640 | \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
|
---|
3641 | \vbox{
|
---|
3642 | \hrule height\dimen2
|
---|
3643 | \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
|
---|
3644 | \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
|
---|
3645 | \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
|
---|
3646 | \hrule height\dimen2}
|
---|
3647 | \hfil}
|
---|
3648 |
|
---|
3649 | % The @error{} command.
|
---|
3650 | \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
|
---|
3651 |
|
---|
3652 | % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
|
---|
3653 | % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
|
---|
3654 | % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
|
---|
3655 |
|
---|
3656 | \def\tex{\begingroup
|
---|
3657 | \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
|
---|
3658 | \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
|
---|
3659 | \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
|
---|
3660 | \catcode `\%=14
|
---|
3661 | \catcode 43=12 % plus
|
---|
3662 | \catcode`\"=12
|
---|
3663 | \catcode`\==12
|
---|
3664 | \catcode`\|=12
|
---|
3665 | \catcode`\<=12
|
---|
3666 | \catcode`\>=12
|
---|
3667 | \escapechar=`\\
|
---|
3668 | %
|
---|
3669 | \let\b=\ptexb
|
---|
3670 | \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
|
---|
3671 | \let\c=\ptexc
|
---|
3672 | \let\,=\ptexcomma
|
---|
3673 | \let\.=\ptexdot
|
---|
3674 | \let\dots=\ptexdots
|
---|
3675 | \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
|
---|
3676 | \let\!=\ptexexclam
|
---|
3677 | \let\i=\ptexi
|
---|
3678 | \let\{=\ptexlbrace
|
---|
3679 | \let\+=\tabalign
|
---|
3680 | \let\}=\ptexrbrace
|
---|
3681 | \let\*=\ptexstar
|
---|
3682 | \let\t=\ptext
|
---|
3683 | %
|
---|
3684 | \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
|
---|
3685 | \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
|
---|
3686 | \def\@{@}%
|
---|
3687 | \let\Etex=\endgroup}
|
---|
3688 |
|
---|
3689 | % Define @lisp ... @endlisp.
|
---|
3690 | % @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
|
---|
3691 | % including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous).
|
---|
3692 |
|
---|
3693 | % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
|
---|
3694 | \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
|
---|
3695 |
|
---|
3696 | % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
|
---|
3697 | % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
|
---|
3698 | % have any width.
|
---|
3699 | \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
|
---|
3700 |
|
---|
3701 | % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
|
---|
3702 | % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
|
---|
3703 | % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
|
---|
3704 | % should produce a line of output anyway.
|
---|
3705 | %
|
---|
3706 | {\obeyspaces %
|
---|
3707 | \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
|
---|
3708 |
|
---|
3709 | % Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is. This is
|
---|
3710 | % for use in \parsearg.
|
---|
3711 | {\sepspaces%
|
---|
3712 | \global\let\obeyedspace= }
|
---|
3713 |
|
---|
3714 | % This space is always present above and below environments.
|
---|
3715 | \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
|
---|
3716 |
|
---|
3717 | % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
|
---|
3718 | % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
|
---|
3719 | % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
|
---|
3720 | % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
|
---|
3721 | %
|
---|
3722 | \def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
|
---|
3723 | \endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
|
---|
3724 | \removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}}
|
---|
3725 |
|
---|
3726 | \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
|
---|
3727 |
|
---|
3728 | % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
|
---|
3729 | \let\nonarrowing=\relax
|
---|
3730 |
|
---|
3731 | % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
|
---|
3732 | % environment contents.
|
---|
3733 | \font\circle=lcircle10
|
---|
3734 | \newdimen\circthick
|
---|
3735 | \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
|
---|
3736 | \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
|
---|
3737 | \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
|
---|
3738 | %
|
---|
3739 | \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
|
---|
3740 | \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
|
---|
3741 | \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
|
---|
3742 | \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
|
---|
3743 | \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
---|
3744 | \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
|
---|
3745 | \hskip\rskip}}
|
---|
3746 | \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
---|
3747 | \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
|
---|
3748 | \hskip\rskip}}
|
---|
3749 | %
|
---|
3750 | \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
|
---|
3751 |
|
---|
3752 | \long\def\cartouche{%
|
---|
3753 | \begingroup
|
---|
3754 | \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
|
---|
3755 | \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
|
---|
3756 | \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
|
---|
3757 | \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
|
---|
3758 | \cartouter=\hsize
|
---|
3759 | \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
|
---|
3760 | % side, and for 6pt waste from
|
---|
3761 | % each corner char, and rule thickness
|
---|
3762 | \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
|
---|
3763 | % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
|
---|
3764 | \let\nonarrowing=\comment
|
---|
3765 | \vbox\bgroup
|
---|
3766 | \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
|
---|
3767 | \carttop
|
---|
3768 | \hbox\bgroup
|
---|
3769 | \hskip\lskip
|
---|
3770 | \vrule\kern3pt
|
---|
3771 | \vbox\bgroup
|
---|
3772 | \hsize=\cartinner
|
---|
3773 | \kern3pt
|
---|
3774 | \begingroup
|
---|
3775 | \baselineskip=\normbskip
|
---|
3776 | \lineskip=\normlskip
|
---|
3777 | \parskip=\normpskip
|
---|
3778 | \vskip -\parskip
|
---|
3779 | \def\Ecartouche{%
|
---|
3780 | \endgroup
|
---|
3781 | \kern3pt
|
---|
3782 | \egroup
|
---|
3783 | \kern3pt\vrule
|
---|
3784 | \hskip\rskip
|
---|
3785 | \egroup
|
---|
3786 | \cartbot
|
---|
3787 | \egroup
|
---|
3788 | \endgroup
|
---|
3789 | }}
|
---|
3790 |
|
---|
3791 |
|
---|
3792 | % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
|
---|
3793 | % inside a group.
|
---|
3794 | \def\nonfillstart{%
|
---|
3795 | \aboveenvbreak
|
---|
3796 | \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
|
---|
3797 | \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
|
---|
3798 | \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
|
---|
3799 | \singlespace
|
---|
3800 | \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
|
---|
3801 | \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
|
---|
3802 | \parskip = 0pt
|
---|
3803 | \parindent = 0pt
|
---|
3804 | \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
|
---|
3805 | % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
|
---|
3806 | % at next level down.
|
---|
3807 | \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
---|
3808 | \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
---|
3809 | \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
|
---|
3810 | \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
|
---|
3811 | \let\nonarrowing=\relax
|
---|
3812 | \fi
|
---|
3813 | }
|
---|
3814 |
|
---|
3815 | % Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
|
---|
3816 | % environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
|
---|
3817 | %
|
---|
3818 | % To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
|
---|
3819 | % \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we keep
|
---|
3820 | % the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
|
---|
3821 | % inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
|
---|
3822 | % the environment.
|
---|
3823 | %
|
---|
3824 | \def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
|
---|
3825 |
|
---|
3826 | % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
|
---|
3827 | \def\lisp{\begingroup
|
---|
3828 | \nonfillstart
|
---|
3829 | \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
|
---|
3830 | \tt
|
---|
3831 | \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
|
---|
3832 | \gobble % eat return
|
---|
3833 | }
|
---|
3834 |
|
---|
3835 | % @example: Same as @lisp.
|
---|
3836 | \def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
|
---|
3837 |
|
---|
3838 | % @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
|
---|
3839 | % redefines). We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
|
---|
3840 | % definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
|
---|
3841 | % whatever) command.
|
---|
3842 | %
|
---|
3843 | % This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
|
---|
3844 | % @smalldisplay. Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
|
---|
3845 | %
|
---|
3846 | \def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
|
---|
3847 | \def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
|
---|
3848 | \def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
|
---|
3849 | \def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
|
---|
3850 |
|
---|
3851 | % Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
|
---|
3852 | % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
|
---|
3853 | \def\smalllispx{\begingroup
|
---|
3854 | \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
|
---|
3855 | \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
|
---|
3856 | \indexfonts
|
---|
3857 | \lisp
|
---|
3858 | }
|
---|
3859 |
|
---|
3860 | % @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
|
---|
3861 | %
|
---|
3862 | \def\display{\begingroup
|
---|
3863 | \nonfillstart
|
---|
3864 | \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
|
---|
3865 | \gobble
|
---|
3866 | }
|
---|
3867 |
|
---|
3868 | % @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
|
---|
3869 | %
|
---|
3870 | \def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
|
---|
3871 | \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
|
---|
3872 | \indexfonts \rm
|
---|
3873 | \display
|
---|
3874 | }
|
---|
3875 |
|
---|
3876 | % @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
|
---|
3877 | %
|
---|
3878 | \def\format{\begingroup
|
---|
3879 | \let\nonarrowing = t
|
---|
3880 | \nonfillstart
|
---|
3881 | \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
|
---|
3882 | \gobble
|
---|
3883 | }
|
---|
3884 |
|
---|
3885 | % @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
|
---|
3886 | %
|
---|
3887 | \def\smallformatx{\begingroup
|
---|
3888 | \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
|
---|
3889 | \indexfonts \rm
|
---|
3890 | \format
|
---|
3891 | }
|
---|
3892 |
|
---|
3893 | % @flushleft (same as @format).
|
---|
3894 | %
|
---|
3895 | \def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
|
---|
3896 |
|
---|
3897 | % @flushright.
|
---|
3898 | %
|
---|
3899 | \def\flushright{\begingroup
|
---|
3900 | \let\nonarrowing = t
|
---|
3901 | \nonfillstart
|
---|
3902 | \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
|
---|
3903 | \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
|
---|
3904 | \gobble
|
---|
3905 | }
|
---|
3906 |
|
---|
3907 | % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
|
---|
3908 | % and narrows the margins.
|
---|
3909 | %
|
---|
3910 | \def\quotation{%
|
---|
3911 | \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
|
---|
3912 | {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
|
---|
3913 | \singlespace
|
---|
3914 | \parindent=0pt
|
---|
3915 | % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
|
---|
3916 | % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
|
---|
3917 | \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
|
---|
3918 | %
|
---|
3919 | % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
|
---|
3920 | \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
---|
3921 | \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
---|
3922 | \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
|
---|
3923 | \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
|
---|
3924 | \let\nonarrowing = \relax
|
---|
3925 | \fi
|
---|
3926 | }
|
---|
3927 |
|
---|
3928 |
|
---|
3929 | \message{defuns,}
|
---|
3930 | % Define formatter for defuns
|
---|
3931 | % First, allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
|
---|
3932 | \def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
|
---|
3933 |
|
---|
3934 | \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
|
---|
3935 | \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
|
---|
3936 | \newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
|
---|
3937 | \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
|
---|
3938 |
|
---|
3939 | \newcount\parencount
|
---|
3940 | % define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
|
---|
3941 | % \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
|
---|
3942 | \def\activeparens{%
|
---|
3943 | \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
|
---|
3944 | \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
|
---|
3945 |
|
---|
3946 | % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
|
---|
3947 | \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
|
---|
3948 |
|
---|
3949 | {\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
|
---|
3950 |
|
---|
3951 | % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
|
---|
3952 | % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
|
---|
3953 | % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
|
---|
3954 | \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
|
---|
3955 | \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
|
---|
3956 |
|
---|
3957 | \gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
|
---|
3958 | \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
|
---|
3959 | % This is used to turn on special parens
|
---|
3960 | % but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
|
---|
3961 | \gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
|
---|
3962 |
|
---|
3963 | % Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
|
---|
3964 | % This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
|
---|
3965 | \gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
|
---|
3966 | \global\advance\parencount by 1
|
---|
3967 | }
|
---|
3968 | %
|
---|
3969 | % This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
|
---|
3970 | \gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
|
---|
3971 | %
|
---|
3972 | \gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
|
---|
3973 | % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
|
---|
3974 | \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
|
---|
3975 | \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
|
---|
3976 | % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
|
---|
3977 | \gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
|
---|
3978 | %
|
---|
3979 | \gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
|
---|
3980 | } % End of definition inside \activeparens
|
---|
3981 | %% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
|
---|
3982 | %% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ]
|
---|
3983 | \def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
|
---|
3984 | \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
|
---|
3985 | \def\ampnr{\&}
|
---|
3986 | \def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
|
---|
3987 | \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
|
---|
3988 |
|
---|
3989 | % First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
|
---|
3990 | % #1 should be the function name.
|
---|
3991 | % #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
|
---|
3992 |
|
---|
3993 | \def\defname #1#2{%
|
---|
3994 | % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
|
---|
3995 | % outside the @def...
|
---|
3996 | \dimen2=\leftskip
|
---|
3997 | \advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
|
---|
3998 | \noindent
|
---|
3999 | \setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
|
---|
4000 | \dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
|
---|
4001 | \dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
|
---|
4002 | \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
|
---|
4003 | % Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
|
---|
4004 | % ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
|
---|
4005 | % but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
|
---|
4006 | {% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
|
---|
4007 | % so that \rightline will obey them.
|
---|
4008 | \advance \hsize by -\dimen2
|
---|
4009 | \rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
|
---|
4010 | % Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
|
---|
4011 | \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
|
---|
4012 | \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
|
---|
4013 | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
---|
4014 | {\df #1}\enskip % Generate function name
|
---|
4015 | }
|
---|
4016 |
|
---|
4017 | % Actually process the body of a definition
|
---|
4018 | % #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
|
---|
4019 | % #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
|
---|
4020 | % #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
|
---|
4021 | % such as \defunheader.
|
---|
4022 |
|
---|
4023 | \def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
|
---|
4024 | \medbreak %
|
---|
4025 | % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
---|
4026 | % so that it will exit this group.
|
---|
4027 | \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
---|
4028 | \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
|
---|
4029 | \parindent=0in
|
---|
4030 | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
---|
4031 | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
---|
4032 | \begingroup %
|
---|
4033 | \catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
|
---|
4034 | \obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
|
---|
4035 |
|
---|
4036 | % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
|
---|
4037 | % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
|
---|
4038 | % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
|
---|
4039 | % #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
|
---|
4040 | %
|
---|
4041 | \def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
|
---|
4042 | \medbreak %
|
---|
4043 | % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
---|
4044 | % so that it will exit this group.
|
---|
4045 | \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
---|
4046 | \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
|
---|
4047 | \parindent=0in
|
---|
4048 | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
---|
4049 | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
---|
4050 | \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
|
---|
4051 |
|
---|
4052 | % @deftypemethod has an extra argument that nothing else does. Sigh.
|
---|
4053 | % #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
|
---|
4054 | % #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
|
---|
4055 | % #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
|
---|
4056 | % #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
|
---|
4057 | % #5 is the method's return type.
|
---|
4058 | %
|
---|
4059 | \def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV %
|
---|
4060 | \medbreak %
|
---|
4061 | % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
---|
4062 | % so that it will exit this group.
|
---|
4063 | \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
---|
4064 | \def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
|
---|
4065 | \parindent=0in
|
---|
4066 | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
---|
4067 | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
---|
4068 | \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}}
|
---|
4069 |
|
---|
4070 | \def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
|
---|
4071 | \medbreak %
|
---|
4072 | % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
---|
4073 | % so that it will exit this group.
|
---|
4074 | \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
---|
4075 | \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
|
---|
4076 | \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
|
---|
4077 | \parindent=0in
|
---|
4078 | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
---|
4079 | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
---|
4080 | \begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
|
---|
4081 |
|
---|
4082 | % These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
|
---|
4083 | % except that they do not make parens into active characters.
|
---|
4084 | % These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
|
---|
4085 |
|
---|
4086 | \def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
|
---|
4087 | \medbreak %
|
---|
4088 | % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
---|
4089 | % so that it will exit this group.
|
---|
4090 | \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
---|
4091 | \def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
|
---|
4092 | \parindent=0in
|
---|
4093 | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
---|
4094 | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
---|
4095 | \begingroup %
|
---|
4096 | \catcode 61=\active %
|
---|
4097 | \obeylines\spacesplit#3}
|
---|
4098 |
|
---|
4099 | % This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody. It could probably be used for
|
---|
4100 | % some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
|
---|
4101 | %
|
---|
4102 | \def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
|
---|
4103 | \begingroup\inENV %
|
---|
4104 | \medbreak %
|
---|
4105 | % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
---|
4106 | % so that it will exit this group.
|
---|
4107 | \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
---|
4108 | \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
|
---|
4109 | \parindent=0in
|
---|
4110 | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
---|
4111 | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
---|
4112 | \begingroup\obeylines
|
---|
4113 | }
|
---|
4114 |
|
---|
4115 | \def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
|
---|
4116 | \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
---|
4117 | \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
|
---|
4118 | }
|
---|
4119 |
|
---|
4120 | % This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
|
---|
4121 | % type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
|
---|
4122 | % termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument. Sigh.
|
---|
4123 | % \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
|
---|
4124 | %
|
---|
4125 | % So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name. That
|
---|
4126 | % way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
|
---|
4127 | % won't strip off the braces.
|
---|
4128 | %
|
---|
4129 | \def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
|
---|
4130 | \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
---|
4131 | \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
|
---|
4132 | }
|
---|
4133 |
|
---|
4134 | % Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
|
---|
4135 | % braces (if any). That's what this does.
|
---|
4136 | %
|
---|
4137 | \def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
|
---|
4138 |
|
---|
4139 | % After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
|
---|
4140 | % thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
|
---|
4141 | % (which might be empty) the arguments.
|
---|
4142 | %
|
---|
4143 | \def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
|
---|
4144 | #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
|
---|
4145 | }%
|
---|
4146 |
|
---|
4147 | \def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
|
---|
4148 | \medbreak %
|
---|
4149 | % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
|
---|
4150 | % so that it will exit this group.
|
---|
4151 | \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
---|
4152 | \def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
|
---|
4153 | \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
|
---|
4154 | \parindent=0in
|
---|
4155 | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
---|
4156 | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
---|
4157 | \begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
|
---|
4158 |
|
---|
4159 | % Split up #2 at the first space token.
|
---|
4160 | % call #1 with two arguments:
|
---|
4161 | % the first is all of #2 before the space token,
|
---|
4162 | % the second is all of #2 after that space token.
|
---|
4163 | % If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
|
---|
4164 | % and the second is passed as empty.
|
---|
4165 |
|
---|
4166 | {\obeylines
|
---|
4167 | \gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
|
---|
4168 | \long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
|
---|
4169 | \ifx\relax #3%
|
---|
4170 | #1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
|
---|
4171 |
|
---|
4172 | % So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
|
---|
4173 |
|
---|
4174 | % Define @defun.
|
---|
4175 |
|
---|
4176 | % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
|
---|
4177 | % Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
|
---|
4178 |
|
---|
4179 | \def\defunargs #1{\functionparens \sl
|
---|
4180 | % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
|
---|
4181 | % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
|
---|
4182 | \hyphenchar\tensl=0
|
---|
4183 | #1%
|
---|
4184 | \hyphenchar\tensl=45
|
---|
4185 | \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
|
---|
4186 | \interlinepenalty=10000
|
---|
4187 | \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
|
---|
4188 | \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
|
---|
4189 | }
|
---|
4190 |
|
---|
4191 | \def\deftypefunargs #1{%
|
---|
4192 | % Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
|
---|
4193 | % Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
|
---|
4194 | % Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
|
---|
4195 | \boldbraxnoamp
|
---|
4196 | \tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
|
---|
4197 | \interlinepenalty=10000
|
---|
4198 | \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
|
---|
4199 | \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
|
---|
4200 | }
|
---|
4201 |
|
---|
4202 | % Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
|
---|
4203 |
|
---|
4204 | % @deffn Command forward-char nchars
|
---|
4205 |
|
---|
4206 | \def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
|
---|
4207 |
|
---|
4208 | \def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
|
---|
4209 | \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
|
---|
4210 | \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
---|
4211 | }
|
---|
4212 |
|
---|
4213 | % @defun == @deffn Function
|
---|
4214 |
|
---|
4215 | \def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
|
---|
4216 |
|
---|
4217 | \def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
|
---|
4218 | \begingroup\defname {#1}{Function}%
|
---|
4219 | \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
---|
4220 | \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
---|
4221 | }
|
---|
4222 |
|
---|
4223 | % @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
|
---|
4224 |
|
---|
4225 | \def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
|
---|
4226 |
|
---|
4227 | % #1 is the data type. #2 is the name and args.
|
---|
4228 | \def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
|
---|
4229 | % #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
|
---|
4230 | \def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
|
---|
4231 | \doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
|
---|
4232 | \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Function}%
|
---|
4233 | \deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
|
---|
4234 | \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
---|
4235 | }
|
---|
4236 |
|
---|
4237 | % @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
|
---|
4238 |
|
---|
4239 | \def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
|
---|
4240 |
|
---|
4241 | % \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$
|
---|
4242 | % puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
|
---|
4243 | \def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
|
---|
4244 |
|
---|
4245 | % #1 is the classification. #2 is the data type. #3 is the name and args.
|
---|
4246 | \def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
|
---|
4247 | % #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
|
---|
4248 | \def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
|
---|
4249 | \doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
|
---|
4250 | \begingroup
|
---|
4251 | \normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
|
---|
4252 | % at least some C++ text from working
|
---|
4253 | \defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}%
|
---|
4254 | \deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
|
---|
4255 | \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
---|
4256 | }
|
---|
4257 |
|
---|
4258 | % @defmac == @deffn Macro
|
---|
4259 |
|
---|
4260 | \def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
|
---|
4261 |
|
---|
4262 | \def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
|
---|
4263 | \begingroup\defname {#1}{Macro}%
|
---|
4264 | \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
---|
4265 | \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
---|
4266 | }
|
---|
4267 |
|
---|
4268 | % @defspec == @deffn Special Form
|
---|
4269 |
|
---|
4270 | \def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
|
---|
4271 |
|
---|
4272 | \def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
|
---|
4273 | \begingroup\defname {#1}{Special Form}%
|
---|
4274 | \defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
---|
4275 | \catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
---|
4276 | }
|
---|
4277 |
|
---|
4278 | % This definition is run if you use @defunx
|
---|
4279 | % anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
|
---|
4280 |
|
---|
4281 | \def\deffnx #1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
|
---|
4282 | \def\defunx #1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
|
---|
4283 | \def\defmacx #1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
|
---|
4284 | \def\defspecx #1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
|
---|
4285 | \def\deftypefnx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
|
---|
4286 | \def\deftypemethodx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
|
---|
4287 | \def\deftypefunx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
|
---|
4288 |
|
---|
4289 | % @defmethod, and so on
|
---|
4290 |
|
---|
4291 | % @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
|
---|
4292 |
|
---|
4293 | \def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
|
---|
4294 | \defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
|
---|
4295 |
|
---|
4296 | \def\defopheader #1#2#3{%
|
---|
4297 | \dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
|
---|
4298 | \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype{} on #1}%
|
---|
4299 | \defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
|
---|
4300 | }
|
---|
4301 |
|
---|
4302 | % @deftypemethod CLASS RETURN-TYPE METHOD ARG...
|
---|
4303 | %
|
---|
4304 | \def\deftypemethod{%
|
---|
4305 | \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
|
---|
4306 | %
|
---|
4307 | % #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
|
---|
4308 | \def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
|
---|
4309 | \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
|
---|
4310 | \begingroup
|
---|
4311 | \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
|
---|
4312 | \deftypefunargs{#4}%
|
---|
4313 | \endgroup
|
---|
4314 | }
|
---|
4315 |
|
---|
4316 | % @defmethod == @defop Method
|
---|
4317 | %
|
---|
4318 | \def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
|
---|
4319 | %
|
---|
4320 | % #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
|
---|
4321 | \def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
|
---|
4322 | \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
|
---|
4323 | \begingroup
|
---|
4324 | \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
|
---|
4325 | \defunargs{#3}%
|
---|
4326 | \endgroup
|
---|
4327 | }
|
---|
4328 |
|
---|
4329 | % @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
|
---|
4330 |
|
---|
4331 | \def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
|
---|
4332 | \defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
|
---|
4333 |
|
---|
4334 | \def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
|
---|
4335 | \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index
|
---|
4336 | \begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype{} of #1}%
|
---|
4337 | \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
|
---|
4338 | }
|
---|
4339 |
|
---|
4340 | % @defivar == @defcv {Instance Variable}
|
---|
4341 |
|
---|
4342 | \def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
|
---|
4343 |
|
---|
4344 | \def\defivarheader #1#2#3{%
|
---|
4345 | \dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index
|
---|
4346 | \begingroup\defname {#2}{Instance Variable of #1}%
|
---|
4347 | \defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
|
---|
4348 | }
|
---|
4349 |
|
---|
4350 | % These definitions are run if you use @defmethodx, etc.,
|
---|
4351 | % anywhere other than immediately after a @defmethod, etc.
|
---|
4352 |
|
---|
4353 | \def\defopx #1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
|
---|
4354 | \def\defmethodx #1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
|
---|
4355 | \def\defcvx #1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
|
---|
4356 | \def\defivarx #1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
|
---|
4357 |
|
---|
4358 | % Now @defvar
|
---|
4359 |
|
---|
4360 | % First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
|
---|
4361 | % This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
|
---|
4362 | % This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
|
---|
4363 | \def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
|
---|
4364 | \interlinepenalty=10000
|
---|
4365 | \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
|
---|
4366 |
|
---|
4367 | % @defvr Counter foo-count
|
---|
4368 |
|
---|
4369 | \def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
|
---|
4370 |
|
---|
4371 | \def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
|
---|
4372 | \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
|
---|
4373 |
|
---|
4374 | % @defvar == @defvr Variable
|
---|
4375 |
|
---|
4376 | \def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
|
---|
4377 |
|
---|
4378 | \def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
|
---|
4379 | \begingroup\defname {#1}{Variable}%
|
---|
4380 | \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
---|
4381 | }
|
---|
4382 |
|
---|
4383 | % @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
|
---|
4384 |
|
---|
4385 | \def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
|
---|
4386 |
|
---|
4387 | \def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
|
---|
4388 | \begingroup\defname {#1}{User Option}%
|
---|
4389 | \defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
---|
4390 | }
|
---|
4391 |
|
---|
4392 | % @deftypevar int foobar
|
---|
4393 |
|
---|
4394 | \def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
|
---|
4395 |
|
---|
4396 | % #1 is the data type. #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
|
---|
4397 | % is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
|
---|
4398 | \def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
|
---|
4399 | \dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
|
---|
4400 | \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Variable}%
|
---|
4401 | \interlinepenalty=10000
|
---|
4402 | \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
|
---|
4403 | \endgroup}
|
---|
4404 | \def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
|
---|
4405 |
|
---|
4406 | % @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
|
---|
4407 |
|
---|
4408 | \def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
|
---|
4409 |
|
---|
4410 | \def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
|
---|
4411 | \begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}
|
---|
4412 | \interlinepenalty=10000
|
---|
4413 | \endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
|
---|
4414 | \endgroup}
|
---|
4415 |
|
---|
4416 | % This definition is run if you use @defvarx
|
---|
4417 | % anywhere other than immediately after a @defvar or @defvarx.
|
---|
4418 |
|
---|
4419 | \def\defvrx #1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
|
---|
4420 | \def\defvarx #1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
|
---|
4421 | \def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
|
---|
4422 | \def\deftypevarx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
|
---|
4423 | \def\deftypevrx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
|
---|
4424 |
|
---|
4425 | % Now define @deftp
|
---|
4426 | % Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
|
---|
4427 |
|
---|
4428 | \def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
|
---|
4429 |
|
---|
4430 | % @deftp Class window height width ...
|
---|
4431 |
|
---|
4432 | \def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
|
---|
4433 |
|
---|
4434 | \def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
|
---|
4435 | \begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
|
---|
4436 |
|
---|
4437 | % This definition is run if you use @deftpx, etc
|
---|
4438 | % anywhere other than immediately after a @deftp, etc.
|
---|
4439 |
|
---|
4440 | \def\deftpx #1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
|
---|
4441 |
|
---|
4442 |
|
---|
4443 | \message{macros,}
|
---|
4444 | % @macro.
|
---|
4445 |
|
---|
4446 | % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
|
---|
4447 | % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
|
---|
4448 | \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
|
---|
4449 | \newwrite\macscribble
|
---|
4450 | \def\scanmacro#1{%
|
---|
4451 | \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
|
---|
4452 | \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
|
---|
4453 | \immediate\write\macscribble{#1}%
|
---|
4454 | \immediate\closeout\macscribble
|
---|
4455 | \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
|
---|
4456 | \input \jobname.tmp
|
---|
4457 | \endgroup
|
---|
4458 | }
|
---|
4459 | \else
|
---|
4460 | \def\scanmacro#1{%
|
---|
4461 | \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
|
---|
4462 | \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1}\endgroup}
|
---|
4463 | \fi
|
---|
4464 |
|
---|
4465 | \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
|
---|
4466 | \newtoks\macname % Macro name
|
---|
4467 | \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
|
---|
4468 |
|
---|
4469 | % Utility routines.
|
---|
4470 | % Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
|
---|
4471 | \def\cslet#1#2{%
|
---|
4472 | \expandafter\expandafter
|
---|
4473 | \expandafter\let
|
---|
4474 | \expandafter\expandafter
|
---|
4475 | \csname#1\endcsname
|
---|
4476 | \csname#2\endcsname}
|
---|
4477 |
|
---|
4478 | % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
|
---|
4479 | % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
|
---|
4480 | {\catcode`\@=11
|
---|
4481 | \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
|
---|
4482 | \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
|
---|
4483 | \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
|
---|
4484 | \def\unbrace#1{#1}
|
---|
4485 | \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
|
---|
4486 | }
|
---|
4487 |
|
---|
4488 | % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
|
---|
4489 | {\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
|
---|
4490 | \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
|
---|
4491 | \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
|
---|
4492 | \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
|
---|
4493 | }
|
---|
4494 |
|
---|
4495 | % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
|
---|
4496 | % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
|
---|
4497 | % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
|
---|
4498 |
|
---|
4499 | % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
|
---|
4500 | % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
|
---|
4501 | % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
|
---|
4502 |
|
---|
4503 | \def\macrobodyctxt{%
|
---|
4504 | \catcode`\~=12
|
---|
4505 | \catcode`\^=12
|
---|
4506 | \catcode`\_=12
|
---|
4507 | \catcode`\|=12
|
---|
4508 | \catcode`\<=12
|
---|
4509 | \catcode`\>=12
|
---|
4510 | \catcode`\+=12
|
---|
4511 | \catcode`\{=12
|
---|
4512 | \catcode`\}=12
|
---|
4513 | \catcode`\@=12
|
---|
4514 | \catcode`\^^M=12
|
---|
4515 | \usembodybackslash}
|
---|
4516 |
|
---|
4517 | \def\macroargctxt{%
|
---|
4518 | \catcode`\~=12
|
---|
4519 | \catcode`\^=12
|
---|
4520 | \catcode`\_=12
|
---|
4521 | \catcode`\|=12
|
---|
4522 | \catcode`\<=12
|
---|
4523 | \catcode`\>=12
|
---|
4524 | \catcode`\+=12
|
---|
4525 | \catcode`\@=12
|
---|
4526 | \catcode`\\=12}
|
---|
4527 |
|
---|
4528 | % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
|
---|
4529 | % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
|
---|
4530 | % where N is the macro parameter number.
|
---|
4531 | % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
|
---|
4532 | % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
|
---|
4533 |
|
---|
4534 | {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
|
---|
4535 | @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
|
---|
4536 | @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
|
---|
4537 | }
|
---|
4538 | \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
|
---|
4539 |
|
---|
4540 | \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
|
---|
4541 | \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
|
---|
4542 |
|
---|
4543 | \def\macroxxx#1{%
|
---|
4544 | \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
|
---|
4545 | \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
|
---|
4546 | \paramno=0%
|
---|
4547 | \else
|
---|
4548 | \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
|
---|
4549 | \fi
|
---|
4550 | \expandafter\ifx \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \relax
|
---|
4551 | \cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
|
---|
4552 | \else
|
---|
4553 | \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
|
---|
4554 | \fi
|
---|
4555 | \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
|
---|
4556 | \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
|
---|
4557 | \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
|
---|
4558 | \fi}
|
---|
4559 |
|
---|
4560 | \def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
|
---|
4561 | \def\unmacroxxx#1{%
|
---|
4562 | \expandafter\ifx \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \relax
|
---|
4563 | \errmessage{Macro \the\macname\ not defined.}%
|
---|
4564 | \else
|
---|
4565 | \cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
|
---|
4566 | \expandafter\let \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \undefined
|
---|
4567 | \fi
|
---|
4568 | }
|
---|
4569 |
|
---|
4570 | % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
|
---|
4571 | % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
|
---|
4572 | % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
|
---|
4573 | \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
|
---|
4574 | \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
|
---|
4575 | \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
|
---|
4576 | \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
|
---|
4577 |
|
---|
4578 | % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
|
---|
4579 | % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
|
---|
4580 | % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
|
---|
4581 | % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
|
---|
4582 |
|
---|
4583 | % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
|
---|
4584 | % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
|
---|
4585 | % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
|
---|
4586 | % it to # just before using the token list produced.
|
---|
4587 | %
|
---|
4588 | % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
|
---|
4589 | % the macro is used.
|
---|
4590 |
|
---|
4591 | \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
|
---|
4592 | \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
|
---|
4593 | \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
|
---|
4594 | \if#1;\let\next=\relax
|
---|
4595 | \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
|
---|
4596 | \advance\paramno by 1%
|
---|
4597 | \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
|
---|
4598 | {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
|
---|
4599 | \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
|
---|
4600 | \fi\next}
|
---|
4601 |
|
---|
4602 | % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
|
---|
4603 | % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
|
---|
4604 |
|
---|
4605 | \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
|
---|
4606 | {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
|
---|
4607 | \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
|
---|
4608 | {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
|
---|
4609 |
|
---|
4610 | % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
|
---|
4611 | % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
|
---|
4612 | % Much magic with \expandafter here.
|
---|
4613 | % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
|
---|
4614 | % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
|
---|
4615 | \def\defmacro{%
|
---|
4616 | \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
|
---|
4617 | \ifrecursive
|
---|
4618 | \ifcase\paramno
|
---|
4619 | % 0
|
---|
4620 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
---|
4621 | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
---|
4622 | \or % 1
|
---|
4623 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
---|
4624 | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
---|
4625 | \noexpand\braceorline\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
|
---|
4626 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
|
---|
4627 | \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
---|
4628 | \else % many
|
---|
4629 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
---|
4630 | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
---|
4631 | \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}
|
---|
4632 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
|
---|
4633 | \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
|
---|
4634 | \expandafter\expandafter
|
---|
4635 | \expandafter\xdef
|
---|
4636 | \expandafter\expandafter
|
---|
4637 | \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
|
---|
4638 | \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
---|
4639 | \fi
|
---|
4640 | \else
|
---|
4641 | \ifcase\paramno
|
---|
4642 | % 0
|
---|
4643 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
---|
4644 | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
---|
4645 | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
---|
4646 | \or % 1
|
---|
4647 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
---|
4648 | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
---|
4649 | \noexpand\braceorline\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
|
---|
4650 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
|
---|
4651 | \egroup
|
---|
4652 | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
---|
4653 | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
---|
4654 | \else % many
|
---|
4655 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
---|
4656 | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
---|
4657 | \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}
|
---|
4658 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
|
---|
4659 | \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
|
---|
4660 | \expandafter\expandafter
|
---|
4661 | \expandafter\xdef
|
---|
4662 | \expandafter\expandafter
|
---|
4663 | \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
|
---|
4664 | \paramlist{%
|
---|
4665 | \egroup
|
---|
4666 | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
---|
4667 | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
---|
4668 | \fi
|
---|
4669 | \fi}
|
---|
4670 |
|
---|
4671 | \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
|
---|
4672 |
|
---|
4673 | % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
|
---|
4674 | % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
|
---|
4675 | % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
|
---|
4676 | % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
|
---|
4677 | \def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
|
---|
4678 | \def\braceorlinexxx{%
|
---|
4679 | \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
|
---|
4680 | \expandafter\parsearg
|
---|
4681 | \fi \next}
|
---|
4682 |
|
---|
4683 |
|
---|
4684 | \message{cross references,}
|
---|
4685 | \newwrite\auxfile
|
---|
4686 |
|
---|
4687 | \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
|
---|
4688 | \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
|
---|
4689 |
|
---|
4690 | % @inforef is relatively simple.
|
---|
4691 | \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
|
---|
4692 | \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
|
---|
4693 | node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
|
---|
4694 |
|
---|
4695 | % @node's job is to define \lastnode.
|
---|
4696 | \def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
|
---|
4697 | \def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
|
---|
4698 | \def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
|
---|
4699 | \let\nwnode=\node
|
---|
4700 | \let\lastnode=\relax
|
---|
4701 |
|
---|
4702 | % The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
|
---|
4703 | \def\donoderef{%
|
---|
4704 | \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
|
---|
4705 | \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
|
---|
4706 | {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
|
---|
4707 | \global\let\lastnode=\relax
|
---|
4708 | \fi
|
---|
4709 | }
|
---|
4710 | \def\unnumbnoderef{%
|
---|
4711 | \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
|
---|
4712 | \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
|
---|
4713 | \global\let\lastnode=\relax
|
---|
4714 | \fi
|
---|
4715 | }
|
---|
4716 | \def\appendixnoderef{%
|
---|
4717 | \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
|
---|
4718 | \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
|
---|
4719 | {Yappendixletterandtype}%
|
---|
4720 | \global\let\lastnode=\relax
|
---|
4721 | \fi
|
---|
4722 | }
|
---|
4723 |
|
---|
4724 |
|
---|
4725 | % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
|
---|
4726 | %
|
---|
4727 | \def\anchor#1{\setref{#1}{Ynothing}}
|
---|
4728 |
|
---|
4729 |
|
---|
4730 | % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
|
---|
4731 | % NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT. Called from \foonoderef. We have
|
---|
4732 | % to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
|
---|
4733 | % aren't expanded. It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
|
---|
4734 | % first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
|
---|
4735 | %
|
---|
4736 | \def\setref#1#2{{%
|
---|
4737 | \indexdummies
|
---|
4738 | \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
|
---|
4739 | \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
|
---|
4740 | \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}
|
---|
4741 | }}
|
---|
4742 |
|
---|
4743 | % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
|
---|
4744 | % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
|
---|
4745 | % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
|
---|
4746 | % manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
|
---|
4747 | %
|
---|
4748 | \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
---|
4749 | \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
---|
4750 | \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
---|
4751 | \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
|
---|
4752 | \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
|
---|
4753 | \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
---|
4754 | \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
|
---|
4755 | \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
|
---|
4756 | \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
|
---|
4757 | % No printed node name was explicitly given.
|
---|
4758 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
|
---|
4759 | % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
|
---|
4760 | \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
---|
4761 | \else
|
---|
4762 | % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
|
---|
4763 | % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
|
---|
4764 | \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
---|
4765 | % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
|
---|
4766 | \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
---|
4767 | \else
|
---|
4768 | \ifhavexrefs
|
---|
4769 | % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
|
---|
4770 | \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
|
---|
4771 | \else
|
---|
4772 | % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
|
---|
4773 | \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
---|
4774 | \fi%
|
---|
4775 | \fi
|
---|
4776 | \fi
|
---|
4777 | \fi
|
---|
4778 | %
|
---|
4779 | % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
|
---|
4780 | % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
|
---|
4781 | % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
|
---|
4782 | % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
|
---|
4783 | % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
|
---|
4784 | % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
|
---|
4785 | \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
---|
4786 | \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' in \cite{\printedmanual}%
|
---|
4787 | \else
|
---|
4788 | % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
|
---|
4789 | % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
|
---|
4790 | % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
|
---|
4791 | % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
|
---|
4792 | % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
|
---|
4793 | {\normalturnoffactive
|
---|
4794 | % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
|
---|
4795 | % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
|
---|
4796 | \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
|
---|
4797 | \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
|
---|
4798 | }%
|
---|
4799 | % [mynode],
|
---|
4800 | [\printednodename],\space
|
---|
4801 | % page 3
|
---|
4802 | \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
|
---|
4803 | \fi
|
---|
4804 | \endgroup}
|
---|
4805 |
|
---|
4806 | % \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
|
---|
4807 |
|
---|
4808 | % Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
|
---|
4809 | % and backslash work in node names. (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
|
---|
4810 | \def\dosetq#1#2{%
|
---|
4811 | {\let\folio=0
|
---|
4812 | \normalturnoffactive
|
---|
4813 | \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
|
---|
4814 | \iflinks
|
---|
4815 | \next
|
---|
4816 | \fi
|
---|
4817 | }%
|
---|
4818 | }
|
---|
4819 |
|
---|
4820 | % \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
|
---|
4821 | % CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
|
---|
4822 | % When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
|
---|
4823 |
|
---|
4824 | \def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
|
---|
4825 |
|
---|
4826 | % Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
|
---|
4827 |
|
---|
4828 | \def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
|
---|
4829 |
|
---|
4830 | \def\Ytitle{\thissection}
|
---|
4831 |
|
---|
4832 | \def\Ynothing{}
|
---|
4833 |
|
---|
4834 | \def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
|
---|
4835 | \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
|
---|
4836 | \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
|
---|
4837 | \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
|
---|
4838 | \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
|
---|
4839 | \else %
|
---|
4840 | \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
|
---|
4841 | \fi \fi \fi }
|
---|
4842 |
|
---|
4843 | \def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
|
---|
4844 | \ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
|
---|
4845 | \else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
|
---|
4846 | \else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
|
---|
4847 | \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
|
---|
4848 | \else %
|
---|
4849 | \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
|
---|
4850 | \fi \fi \fi }
|
---|
4851 |
|
---|
4852 | \gdef\xreftie{'tie}
|
---|
4853 |
|
---|
4854 | % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
|
---|
4855 | % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
|
---|
4856 | %
|
---|
4857 | \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
|
---|
4858 | \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
|
---|
4859 | \else
|
---|
4860 | \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
|
---|
4861 | \fi
|
---|
4862 |
|
---|
4863 | % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
|
---|
4864 | % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
|
---|
4865 |
|
---|
4866 | \def\refx#1#2{%
|
---|
4867 | \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
|
---|
4868 | % If not defined, say something at least.
|
---|
4869 | \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
|
---|
4870 | \iflinks
|
---|
4871 | \ifhavexrefs
|
---|
4872 | \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
|
---|
4873 | \else
|
---|
4874 | \ifwarnedxrefs\else
|
---|
4875 | \global\warnedxrefstrue
|
---|
4876 | \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
|
---|
4877 | \fi
|
---|
4878 | \fi
|
---|
4879 | \fi
|
---|
4880 | \else
|
---|
4881 | % It's defined, so just use it.
|
---|
4882 | \csname X#1\endcsname
|
---|
4883 | \fi
|
---|
4884 | #2% Output the suffix in any case.
|
---|
4885 | }
|
---|
4886 |
|
---|
4887 | % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
|
---|
4888 | %
|
---|
4889 | \def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
|
---|
4890 | % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
|
---|
4891 | \catcode`\\ = 0
|
---|
4892 | \afterassignment\endgroup
|
---|
4893 | \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
|
---|
4894 | }
|
---|
4895 |
|
---|
4896 | % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
|
---|
4897 | \def\readauxfile{\begingroup
|
---|
4898 | \catcode`\^^@=\other
|
---|
4899 | \catcode`\^^A=\other
|
---|
4900 | \catcode`\^^B=\other
|
---|
4901 | \catcode`\^^C=\other
|
---|
4902 | \catcode`\^^D=\other
|
---|
4903 | \catcode`\^^E=\other
|
---|
4904 | \catcode`\^^F=\other
|
---|
4905 | \catcode`\^^G=\other
|
---|
4906 | \catcode`\^^H=\other
|
---|
4907 | \catcode`\^^K=\other
|
---|
4908 | \catcode`\^^L=\other
|
---|
4909 | \catcode`\^^N=\other
|
---|
4910 | \catcode`\^^P=\other
|
---|
4911 | \catcode`\^^Q=\other
|
---|
4912 | \catcode`\^^R=\other
|
---|
4913 | \catcode`\^^S=\other
|
---|
4914 | \catcode`\^^T=\other
|
---|
4915 | \catcode`\^^U=\other
|
---|
4916 | \catcode`\^^V=\other
|
---|
4917 | \catcode`\^^W=\other
|
---|
4918 | \catcode`\^^X=\other
|
---|
4919 | \catcode`\^^Z=\other
|
---|
4920 | \catcode`\^^[=\other
|
---|
4921 | \catcode`\^^\=\other
|
---|
4922 | \catcode`\^^]=\other
|
---|
4923 | \catcode`\^^^=\other
|
---|
4924 | \catcode`\^^_=\other
|
---|
4925 | \catcode`\@=\other
|
---|
4926 | \catcode`\^=\other
|
---|
4927 | % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
|
---|
4928 | % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
|
---|
4929 | % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
|
---|
4930 | % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
|
---|
4931 | % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
|
---|
4932 | % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
|
---|
4933 | % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
|
---|
4934 | % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
|
---|
4935 | %
|
---|
4936 | % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
|
---|
4937 | % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
|
---|
4938 | % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
|
---|
4939 | %
|
---|
4940 | \catcode`\~=\other
|
---|
4941 | \catcode`\[=\other
|
---|
4942 | \catcode`\]=\other
|
---|
4943 | \catcode`\"=\other
|
---|
4944 | \catcode`\_=\other
|
---|
4945 | \catcode`\|=\other
|
---|
4946 | \catcode`\<=\other
|
---|
4947 | \catcode`\>=\other
|
---|
4948 | \catcode`\$=\other
|
---|
4949 | \catcode`\#=\other
|
---|
4950 | \catcode`\&=\other
|
---|
4951 | \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
|
---|
4952 | % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
|
---|
4953 | {%
|
---|
4954 | \count 1=128
|
---|
4955 | \def\loop{%
|
---|
4956 | \catcode\count 1=\other
|
---|
4957 | \advance\count 1 by 1
|
---|
4958 | \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
|
---|
4959 | }%
|
---|
4960 | }%
|
---|
4961 | % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
|
---|
4962 | % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
|
---|
4963 | % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
|
---|
4964 | % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
|
---|
4965 | % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
|
---|
4966 | % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
|
---|
4967 | \catcode`\{=1
|
---|
4968 | \catcode`\}=2
|
---|
4969 | \catcode`\%=\other
|
---|
4970 | \catcode`\'=0
|
---|
4971 | \catcode`\\=\other
|
---|
4972 | %
|
---|
4973 | \openin 1 \jobname.aux
|
---|
4974 | \ifeof 1 \else
|
---|
4975 | \closein 1
|
---|
4976 | \input \jobname.aux
|
---|
4977 | \global\havexrefstrue
|
---|
4978 | \global\warnedobstrue
|
---|
4979 | \fi
|
---|
4980 | % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
|
---|
4981 | \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
|
---|
4982 | \endgroup}
|
---|
4983 |
|
---|
4984 |
|
---|
4985 | % Footnotes.
|
---|
4986 |
|
---|
4987 | \newcount \footnoteno
|
---|
4988 |
|
---|
4989 | % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
|
---|
4990 | % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
|
---|
4991 | % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
|
---|
4992 | % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
|
---|
4993 | % space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
|
---|
4994 | \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
|
---|
4995 |
|
---|
4996 | % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
|
---|
4997 | \let\footnotestyle=\comment
|
---|
4998 |
|
---|
4999 | \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
|
---|
5000 |
|
---|
5001 | {\catcode `\@=11
|
---|
5002 | %
|
---|
5003 | % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
|
---|
5004 | \gdef\footnote{%
|
---|
5005 | \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
|
---|
5006 | \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
|
---|
5007 | %
|
---|
5008 | % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
|
---|
5009 | % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
|
---|
5010 | \let\@sf\empty
|
---|
5011 | \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
|
---|
5012 | %
|
---|
5013 | % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
|
---|
5014 | \unskip
|
---|
5015 | \thisfootno\@sf
|
---|
5016 | \footnotezzz
|
---|
5017 | }%
|
---|
5018 |
|
---|
5019 | % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
|
---|
5020 | % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
|
---|
5021 | %
|
---|
5022 | % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
|
---|
5023 | % \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
|
---|
5024 | % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
|
---|
5025 | %
|
---|
5026 | \long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
|
---|
5027 | % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
|
---|
5028 | % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
|
---|
5029 | % So reset some parameters.
|
---|
5030 | \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
|
---|
5031 | \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
|
---|
5032 | \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
|
---|
5033 | \floatingpenalty\@MM
|
---|
5034 | \leftskip\z@skip
|
---|
5035 | \rightskip\z@skip
|
---|
5036 | \spaceskip\z@skip
|
---|
5037 | \xspaceskip\z@skip
|
---|
5038 | \parindent\defaultparindent
|
---|
5039 | %
|
---|
5040 | % Hang the footnote text off the number.
|
---|
5041 | \hang
|
---|
5042 | \textindent{\thisfootno}%
|
---|
5043 | %
|
---|
5044 | % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
|
---|
5045 | % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
|
---|
5046 | % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
|
---|
5047 | \footstrut
|
---|
5048 | \futurelet\next\fo@t
|
---|
5049 | }
|
---|
5050 | \def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
|
---|
5051 | \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
|
---|
5052 | \def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
|
---|
5053 | \def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
|
---|
5054 | \def\@foot{\strut\egroup}
|
---|
5055 |
|
---|
5056 | }%end \catcode `\@=11
|
---|
5057 |
|
---|
5058 | % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
|
---|
5059 | % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
|
---|
5060 | % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
|
---|
5061 | %
|
---|
5062 | \def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
|
---|
5063 | \def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
|
---|
5064 | \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
|
---|
5065 | %
|
---|
5066 | \def\setleading#1{%
|
---|
5067 | \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
|
---|
5068 | \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
|
---|
5069 | \normalbaselines
|
---|
5070 | \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
|
---|
5071 | \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
|
---|
5072 | depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
|
---|
5073 | }%
|
---|
5074 | }
|
---|
5075 |
|
---|
5076 | % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
|
---|
5077 | % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
|
---|
5078 | % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
|
---|
5079 | % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
|
---|
5080 | % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
|
---|
5081 | %
|
---|
5082 | \def\|{%
|
---|
5083 | % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
|
---|
5084 | \leavevmode
|
---|
5085 | %
|
---|
5086 | % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
|
---|
5087 | \vadjust{%
|
---|
5088 | % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
|
---|
5089 | % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
|
---|
5090 | \vskip-\baselineskip
|
---|
5091 | %
|
---|
5092 | % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
|
---|
5093 | % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
|
---|
5094 | \llap{%
|
---|
5095 | %
|
---|
5096 | % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
|
---|
5097 | \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
|
---|
5098 | %
|
---|
5099 | % This is the space between the bar and the text.
|
---|
5100 | \hskip 12pt
|
---|
5101 | }%
|
---|
5102 | }%
|
---|
5103 | }
|
---|
5104 |
|
---|
5105 | % For a final copy, take out the rectangles
|
---|
5106 | % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
|
---|
5107 | % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
|
---|
5108 | %
|
---|
5109 | \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
|
---|
5110 |
|
---|
5111 | % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
|
---|
5112 | % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
|
---|
5113 | %
|
---|
5114 | % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
|
---|
5115 | % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
|
---|
5116 | % undone and the next image would fail.
|
---|
5117 | \openin 1 = epsf.tex
|
---|
5118 | \ifeof 1 \else
|
---|
5119 | \closein 1
|
---|
5120 | % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
|
---|
5121 | % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
|
---|
5122 | \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
|
---|
5123 | \input epsf.tex
|
---|
5124 | \fi
|
---|
5125 | %
|
---|
5126 | \newif\ifwarnednoepsf
|
---|
5127 | \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
|
---|
5128 | work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
|
---|
5129 | it from ftp://ftp.tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
|
---|
5130 | %
|
---|
5131 | % Only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
|
---|
5132 | \def\image#1{%
|
---|
5133 | \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
|
---|
5134 | \ifwarnednoepsf \else
|
---|
5135 | \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
|
---|
5136 | \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
|
---|
5137 | \global\warnednoepsftrue
|
---|
5138 | \fi
|
---|
5139 | \else
|
---|
5140 | \imagexxx #1,,,\finish
|
---|
5141 | \fi
|
---|
5142 | }
|
---|
5143 | %
|
---|
5144 | % Arguments to @image:
|
---|
5145 | % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
|
---|
5146 | % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
|
---|
5147 | % #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
|
---|
5148 | \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
|
---|
5149 | % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
|
---|
5150 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
|
---|
5151 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
|
---|
5152 | % If the image is by itself, center it.
|
---|
5153 | \ifvmode
|
---|
5154 | \nobreak\medskip
|
---|
5155 | \nobreak
|
---|
5156 | \centerline{\epsfbox{#1.eps}}%
|
---|
5157 | \bigbreak
|
---|
5158 | \else
|
---|
5159 | \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
|
---|
5160 | \fi
|
---|
5161 | }
|
---|
5162 |
|
---|
5163 |
|
---|
5164 | \message{paper sizes,}
|
---|
5165 | % And other related parameters.
|
---|
5166 |
|
---|
5167 | \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
|
---|
5168 |
|
---|
5169 | \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
|
---|
5170 | \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
|
---|
5171 | \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
|
---|
5172 |
|
---|
5173 | % Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
|
---|
5174 | \vbadness = 10000
|
---|
5175 |
|
---|
5176 | % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
|
---|
5177 | \hbadness = 2000
|
---|
5178 |
|
---|
5179 | % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
|
---|
5180 | \widowpenalty=10000
|
---|
5181 | \clubpenalty=10000
|
---|
5182 |
|
---|
5183 | % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
|
---|
5184 | % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
|
---|
5185 | % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
|
---|
5186 | % \hsize. This makes it come to about 9pt for the 8.5x11 format. We
|
---|
5187 | % call this whenever the paper size is set.
|
---|
5188 | %
|
---|
5189 | \def\setemergencystretch{%
|
---|
5190 | \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
|
---|
5191 | % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
|
---|
5192 | \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
|
---|
5193 | \else
|
---|
5194 | \emergencystretch = \hsize
|
---|
5195 | \divide\emergencystretch by 45
|
---|
5196 | \fi
|
---|
5197 | }
|
---|
5198 |
|
---|
5199 | % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
|
---|
5200 | % 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip. Then whoever calls us can
|
---|
5201 | % set \parskip and call \setleading for \baselineskip.
|
---|
5202 | %
|
---|
5203 | \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
|
---|
5204 | \voffset = #3\relax
|
---|
5205 | \topskip = #6\relax
|
---|
5206 | \splittopskip = \topskip
|
---|
5207 | %
|
---|
5208 | \vsize = #1\relax
|
---|
5209 | \advance\vsize by \topskip
|
---|
5210 | \outervsize = \vsize
|
---|
5211 | \advance\outervsize by 0.6in
|
---|
5212 | \pageheight = \vsize
|
---|
5213 | %
|
---|
5214 | \hsize = #2\relax
|
---|
5215 | \outerhsize = \hsize
|
---|
5216 | \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
|
---|
5217 | \pagewidth = \hsize
|
---|
5218 | %
|
---|
5219 | \normaloffset = #4\relax
|
---|
5220 | \bindingoffset = #5\relax
|
---|
5221 | %
|
---|
5222 | \parindent = \defaultparindent
|
---|
5223 | \setemergencystretch
|
---|
5224 | }
|
---|
5225 |
|
---|
5226 | % @letterpaper (the default).
|
---|
5227 | \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
---|
5228 | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
---|
5229 | \setleading{13.2pt}%
|
---|
5230 | %
|
---|
5231 | % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
|
---|
5232 | \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
|
---|
5233 | }}
|
---|
5234 |
|
---|
5235 | % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
|
---|
5236 | \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
|
---|
5237 | \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
|
---|
5238 | \setleading{12pt}%
|
---|
5239 | %
|
---|
5240 | \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
|
---|
5241 | %
|
---|
5242 | \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
|
---|
5243 | \tolerance = 700
|
---|
5244 | \hfuzz = 1pt
|
---|
5245 | \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
---|
5246 | \deftypemargin = 0pt
|
---|
5247 | \defbodyindent = .5cm
|
---|
5248 | %
|
---|
5249 | \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
|
---|
5250 | \let\smallexample = \smalllispx
|
---|
5251 | \let\smallformat = \smallformatx
|
---|
5252 | \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
|
---|
5253 | }}
|
---|
5254 |
|
---|
5255 | % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
|
---|
5256 | \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
---|
5257 | \setleading{12pt}%
|
---|
5258 | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
---|
5259 | %
|
---|
5260 | \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
|
---|
5261 | %
|
---|
5262 | \tolerance = 700
|
---|
5263 | \hfuzz = 1pt
|
---|
5264 | }}
|
---|
5265 |
|
---|
5266 | % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. Top margin
|
---|
5267 | % 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
|
---|
5268 | \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
|
---|
5269 | \setleading{13.6pt}%
|
---|
5270 | %
|
---|
5271 | \afourpaper
|
---|
5272 | \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
|
---|
5273 | %
|
---|
5274 | \globaldefs = 0
|
---|
5275 | }}
|
---|
5276 |
|
---|
5277 | % Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
|
---|
5278 | \def\afourwide{%
|
---|
5279 | \afourpaper
|
---|
5280 | \internalpagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
|
---|
5281 | %
|
---|
5282 | \globaldefs = 0
|
---|
5283 | }
|
---|
5284 |
|
---|
5285 | % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
|
---|
5286 | % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
|
---|
5287 | % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
|
---|
5288 | %
|
---|
5289 | \def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
|
---|
5290 | \def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
|
---|
5291 | \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
|
---|
5292 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
|
---|
5293 | \globaldefs = 1
|
---|
5294 | %
|
---|
5295 | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
---|
5296 | \setleading{13.2pt}%
|
---|
5297 | %
|
---|
5298 | \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
|
---|
5299 | }}
|
---|
5300 |
|
---|
5301 | % Set default to letter.
|
---|
5302 | %
|
---|
5303 | \letterpaper
|
---|
5304 |
|
---|
5305 | \message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
|
---|
5306 |
|
---|
5307 | % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
|
---|
5308 | \catcode`\"=\other
|
---|
5309 | \catcode`\~=\other
|
---|
5310 | \catcode`\^=\other
|
---|
5311 | \catcode`\_=\other
|
---|
5312 | \catcode`\|=\other
|
---|
5313 | \catcode`\<=\other
|
---|
5314 | \catcode`\>=\other
|
---|
5315 | \catcode`\+=\other
|
---|
5316 | \def\normaldoublequote{"}
|
---|
5317 | \def\normaltilde{~}
|
---|
5318 | \def\normalcaret{^}
|
---|
5319 | \def\normalunderscore{_}
|
---|
5320 | \def\normalverticalbar{|}
|
---|
5321 | \def\normalless{<}
|
---|
5322 | \def\normalgreater{>}
|
---|
5323 | \def\normalplus{+}
|
---|
5324 |
|
---|
5325 | % This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
|
---|
5326 | % where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
|
---|
5327 | % where something hairier probably needs to be done.
|
---|
5328 | %
|
---|
5329 | % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
|
---|
5330 | % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
|
---|
5331 | % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
|
---|
5332 | % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
|
---|
5333 | %
|
---|
5334 | \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\the\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
|
---|
5335 |
|
---|
5336 | % Turn off all special characters except @
|
---|
5337 | % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
|
---|
5338 | % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
|
---|
5339 | % use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
|
---|
5340 |
|
---|
5341 | \catcode`\"=\active
|
---|
5342 | \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
|
---|
5343 | \let"=\activedoublequote
|
---|
5344 | \catcode`\~=\active
|
---|
5345 | \def~{{\tt\char126}}
|
---|
5346 | \chardef\hat=`\^
|
---|
5347 | \catcode`\^=\active
|
---|
5348 | \def^{{\tt \hat}}
|
---|
5349 |
|
---|
5350 | \catcode`\_=\active
|
---|
5351 | \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
|
---|
5352 | % Subroutine for the previous macro.
|
---|
5353 | \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
|
---|
5354 |
|
---|
5355 | \catcode`\|=\active
|
---|
5356 | \def|{{\tt\char124}}
|
---|
5357 | \chardef \less=`\<
|
---|
5358 | \catcode`\<=\active
|
---|
5359 | \def<{{\tt \less}}
|
---|
5360 | \chardef \gtr=`\>
|
---|
5361 | \catcode`\>=\active
|
---|
5362 | \def>{{\tt \gtr}}
|
---|
5363 | \catcode`\+=\active
|
---|
5364 | \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
|
---|
5365 | %\catcode 27=\active
|
---|
5366 | %\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
|
---|
5367 |
|
---|
5368 | % Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
|
---|
5369 | {\catcode`\==\active
|
---|
5370 | \global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
|
---|
5371 |
|
---|
5372 | \catcode`+=\active
|
---|
5373 | \catcode`\_=\active
|
---|
5374 |
|
---|
5375 | % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
|
---|
5376 | % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
|
---|
5377 | % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
|
---|
5378 | % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
|
---|
5379 | \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
|
---|
5380 |
|
---|
5381 | \catcode`\@=0
|
---|
5382 |
|
---|
5383 | % \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
|
---|
5384 | \global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
|
---|
5385 | %{\catcode`\\=\other
|
---|
5386 | %@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
|
---|
5387 |
|
---|
5388 | % \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
|
---|
5389 | {\catcode`\\=\active
|
---|
5390 | @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
|
---|
5391 |
|
---|
5392 | % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
|
---|
5393 | \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
|
---|
5394 |
|
---|
5395 | % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
|
---|
5396 | \escapechar=`\@
|
---|
5397 |
|
---|
5398 | % \catcode 17=0 % Define control-q
|
---|
5399 | \catcode`\\=\active
|
---|
5400 |
|
---|
5401 | % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
|
---|
5402 | % even after parsing them.
|
---|
5403 | @def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
|
---|
5404 | @let\=@realbackslash
|
---|
5405 | @let~=@normaltilde
|
---|
5406 | @let^=@normalcaret
|
---|
5407 | @let_=@normalunderscore
|
---|
5408 | @let|=@normalverticalbar
|
---|
5409 | @let<=@normalless
|
---|
5410 | @let>=@normalgreater
|
---|
5411 | @let+=@normalplus}
|
---|
5412 |
|
---|
5413 | @def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
|
---|
5414 | @let\=@normalbackslash
|
---|
5415 | @let~=@normaltilde
|
---|
5416 | @let^=@normalcaret
|
---|
5417 | @let_=@normalunderscore
|
---|
5418 | @let|=@normalverticalbar
|
---|
5419 | @let<=@normalless
|
---|
5420 | @let>=@normalgreater
|
---|
5421 | @let+=@normalplus}
|
---|
5422 |
|
---|
5423 | % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
|
---|
5424 | % This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
|
---|
5425 | @otherifyactive
|
---|
5426 |
|
---|
5427 | % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
|
---|
5428 | % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
|
---|
5429 | % a backslash.
|
---|
5430 | %
|
---|
5431 | @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
|
---|
5432 | @global@let\ = @eatinput
|
---|
5433 |
|
---|
5434 | % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
|
---|
5435 | % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
|
---|
5436 | % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
|
---|
5437 | % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
|
---|
5438 | % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
|
---|
5439 | %
|
---|
5440 | @gdef@fixbackslash{@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
|
---|
5441 | @catcode`+=@active @catcode`@_=@active}
|
---|
5442 |
|
---|
5443 | % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. The @rm below
|
---|
5444 | % makes sure that the current font starts out as the newly loaded cmr10
|
---|
5445 | @catcode`@$=@other @catcode`@%=@other @catcode`@&=@other @catcode`@#=@other
|
---|
5446 |
|
---|
5447 | @textfonts
|
---|
5448 | @rm
|
---|
5449 |
|
---|
5450 | @c Local variables:
|
---|
5451 | @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
|
---|
5452 | @c End:
|
---|